The acs_exclude_dfs parameter is documented as a way to exclude DFS
channels when performing ACS without disabling DFS altogether. The
problem is this parameter is only enforced when ACS is offloaded to the
driver (WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_ACS_OFFLOAD). So from now on, lets also check
acs_exclude_dfs in the internal ACS implementation to exclude channels
marked with radar detection.
Signed-off-by: Nicolas Escande <nico.escande@gmail.com>
The previous mechanism of unloaded the providers from tls_deinit() did
not work correctly for some cases. In particular, it was possible for
hostapd to end up unloading both providers and not being able to recover
from this if TLS server was not enabled.
Address this more cleanly by introducing a new crypto_unload() function
that will be called when the process is exiting.
Fixes: 097ca6bf0b ("OpenSSL: Unload providers on deinit")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit activates the functionality of the previous commits by
handling the actual events that will trigger the CCA process.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
Process the color collision and color change related events.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
To start the CCA process we need to send NL80211_CMD_COLOR_CHANGE to the
kernel. This commit adds the required code.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
While we are doing CCA the BSS Color Disabled field inside the HE
Operation Parameters field needs to be set.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
This information element is similar to the CSA one. It contains a
counter and the target color. Once the counter expired, the change to
the new color happens.
Just note the current implementation is based on CCA counter attributes
that only take Beacon and Probe Response framesinto account.
(Re)Association Response frames do not currently have kernel APIs to
decrement the CCA counter since mediatek mcu firmware does not support
it yet and it will be added in future firmware release.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
Add the core code for handling BSS color collision events and triggering
CCA inside the kernel. The caller of hostapd_switch_color() will be
added in the following commits.
Tested-by: Peter Chiu <chui-hao.chiu@mediatek.com>
Co-developed-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Ryder Lee <ryder.lee@mediatek.com>
Comment out the call to SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1() function when using
OpenSSL 3.0 since that function was deprecated and there does not seem
to be any significant use case for supporting DER encoded RSAPrivateKey
structure in the private key blob.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 3.0 has deprecated low-level DH/DSA functions. Convert this
loading of the dh_file parameter to use newer API.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was used earlier in the wpa_supplicant configuration, but there was
no real use for that, so remove the now completely unused parameter to
simplify implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These operations do not really have any effect since
tls_connection_set_params() is used only in the TLS client case and the
client receives the DH parameters from the server instead of local
configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The DH file parameters are applicable only for the TLS server, so this
parameter did not really have any impact to functionality. Remove it to
get rid of useless code and confusing documentation for the network
block configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use vendor specific RADIUS attributes for sending ANonce and EAPOL-Key
msg 2/4 for the wpa_psk_radius=3 case. The vendor specific attributes
for this are defined in FreeRADIUS as follows:
BEGIN-VENDOR FreeRADIUS format=Extended-Vendor-Specific-5
ATTRIBUTE FreeRADIUS-802.1X-Anonce 1 octets[32]
ATTRIBUTE FreeRADIUS-802.1X-EAPoL-Key-Msg 2 octets
END-VENDOR FreeRADIUS
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
BoringSSL commit dddb60eb9700110835ff6e2b429de40a17006429 ("Make most of
crypto/x509 opaque.") broke the direct access to these variables, so use
the accessor functions instead.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
BoringSSL commit dddb60eb9700110835ff6e2b429de40a17006429 ("Make most of
crypto/x509 opaque.") broke the stack-allocated version, so move to
using X509_STORE_CTX_new() to get an opaque pointer to X509_STORE_CTX
instead.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Define the EC_GROUP_get_curve() wrapper for the older versions.
Fixes: 3c61f4db4c ("OpenSSL: Replace EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp() calls with EC_GROUP_get_curve()")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 0b5e98557e ("FIPS: Use OpenSSL CMAC implementation instead of
aes-omac1.c") added this implementation initially only for the FIPS
builds. However, there does not seem to be any remaining need to avoid
depending on the OpenSSL library implementation for builds, so move to
that implementation unconditionally to reduce the binary size a bit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 3.0 deprecated the low-level CMAC functions, so use the new
EVP_MAC API for this. Maintain the CMAC API variant for older versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is used with DPP and SAE when using P-384, so prepare the OpenSSL
implementation to support these cases to allow the internal CMAC
implementation in aes-omac1.c to be replaced.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function is not used anymore, but the compatibility wrapper for
older OpenSSL versions was forgotten to be removed.
Fixes: 09c62aaf11 ("OpenSSL: Determine RSA key size without low-level routines")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new DPP_BOOTSTRAP_GEN command parameter supported_curves can be used
to specify a colon separated list of supported curves. Information from
a parsed URI shows this information with a new supp_curves line in the
DPP_BOOTSTRAP_INFO output.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add support to reset eLNA bypass configuration to default behavior.
If value of 2 is configured, the driver can choose either to
disable/enable eLNA bypass control and there is no enforcement
from userspace.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
OpenSSL 3.0 deprecated the low-level DH functions, so use the EVP API
for this. Maintain the DH API variant for older versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 3.0 deprecated the low-level HMAC functions, so use the EVP_MAC
API for this. Maintain the HMAC API variant for older versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This frees up the allocated resources and makes memory leak detection
more convenient without the known allocations being left behind.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 3.0 deprecated the low-level encryption functions, so use the
EVP API for this. Maintain the previous version for BoringSSL and
LibreSSL since not all versions seem to have the EVP_aes_*_wrap()
functions needed for the EVP API.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
aes_encrypt_init() used incorrect function to free the EVP_CIPHER_CTX
allocated within this function. Fix that to use the OpenSSL function for
freeing the context.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add Transmit Power Envelope element for 6 GHz per IEEE Std
802.11ax-2021.
Currently, this uses hard coded EIRP/PSD limits which are applicable to
6 GHz operation in United states, Japan, and Korea. Support to extract
power limits from kernel data will be added after complete regulatory
support is added for the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <quic_pradeepc@quicinc.com>
Add new field definitions for the 6 GHz Operation Information field in
the HE Operation element per IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021, 9.4.2.249. These
will be used for TPC operation in the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <quic_pradeepc@quicinc.com>
IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 introduces Regulatory Info subfield to specify
the 6 GHz access point type per regulatory. Add a user config option for
specifying this.
When not specified, Indoor AP type is selected for the 6 GHz AP by
default.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <quic_pradeepc@quicinc.com>
Add support for the Country element for the 6 GHz band per IEEE Std
802.11ax-2021, 9.4.2.8 (Country element).
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <quic_pradeepc@quicinc.com>
force_kdk_derivation is defined within CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS, so need
to use matching condition when accessing it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The default behavior in wpa_supplicant is to disable use of TLSv1.3 in
EAP-TLS unless explicitly enabled in network configuration. The new
CONFIG_EAP_TLSV1_3=y build parameter can be used to change this to
enable TLSv1.3 by default (if supported by the TLS library).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
It could have been possible to get into an endless loop of retried EAP
authentication followed by failing or not completed 4-way handshake if
there was a different interpretation of EAP authentication result
(success on AP, failure on STA). Avoid this by limiting the number of
consecutive EAPOL reauth attempts without completing the following 4-way
handshake.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
RFC 9190 requires protected result indication to be used with TLSv1.3,
so do not allow EAP-TLS to complete successfully if the server does not
send that indication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
While the drafts for RFC 9190 used a separate Commitment Message term,
that term was removed from the published RFC. Update the debug prints to
match that final language.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The previously used references were pointing to an obsoleted RFC and
draft versions. Replace these with current versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
To support the STA testbed role, the STA has to disable transmitting
EAPOL-Key group msg 2/2 of Group Key Handshake. Add test parameter to
disable sending EAPOL-Key group msg 2/2 of Group Key Handshake.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <quic_vjakkam@quicinc.com>
Unsolicited broadcast Probe Response frame configuration did not work in
hostapd due fils_discovery_min_int being used by mistake where
fils_discovery_max_int should have been used in checking for conflicting
configuration. The latter is the one used to decide whether FILS
discovery is enabled or not.
Signed-off-by: Karthikeyan Kathirvel <quic_kathirve@quicinc.com>
This is a workaround for mac80211 behavior of retransmitting the
Association Request frames multiple times if the link layer retries
(i.e., seq# remains same) fail. The mac80211 initiated retransmission
will use a different seq# and as such, will go through duplicate
detection. If we were to change our DH key for that attempt, there would
be two different DH shared secrets and the STA would likely select the
wrong one.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add an alternative sequence for performing the RADIUS ACL check and PSK
fetch. The previously used (macaddr_acl=2, wpa_psk_radius=2) combination
does this during IEEE 802.11 Authentication frame exchange while the new
option (wpa_psk_radius=3) does this during the 4-way handshake. This
allows some more information to be provided to the RADIUS authentication
server.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The check for PSK/passphrase not being present was considering only the
WPA-PSK AKM, but the same check should be applied for all other AKMs
that can use a PSK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_FEATURE_USE_ADD_DEL_VIRTUAL_INTF_FOR_NDI
flag to indicate that the driver requires add/del virtual interface
path using the generic nl80211 commands for NDP interface create/delete
and to register/unregister of netdev instead of creating/deleting
the NDP interface using vendor commands.
With the latest Linux kernel (5.12 version onward), interface
creation/deletion is not allowed using vendor commands as it leads to a
deadlock while acquiring the RTNL_LOCK during the register/unregister of
netdev. Create and delete NDP interface using NL80211_CMD_NEW_INTERFACE
and NL80211_CMD_DEL_INTERFACE commands respectively if the driver
advertises this capability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This makes the debug log clearer for one of the more likely cases of
"invalid group cipher" preventing RSNE parsing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Copy channels from only valid operating classes in the source channel
list while preparing a non-6 GHz channel/op-classes list when the 6 GHz
band is not used for P2P GO negotiation.
Earlier, during preparation of P2P channels for GO negotiation, a union
of the GO channels and the P2P Client channels is used. While generating
the union in p2p_channels_union_inplace() as the first list itself has
P2P_MAX_REG_CLASSES number of entries, the operating classes from the
second list which are not in the first list were not getting considered.
Fix this by not setting the dst->reg_classes to too large a value.
Fixes: f7d4f1cbec ("P2P: Add a mechanism for allowing 6 GHz channels in channel lists")
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <quic_ssramya@quicinc.com>
While these do not return error code within the current hostapd
implementation, matching functions in wpa_supplicant AP functionality
will have an error case and using consistent return type will make the
control interface code more consistent.
In addition, export hostapd_set_acl() in preparation for the
wpa_supplicant control interface implementation extension.
Signed-off-by: Chaoli Zhou <quic_zchaoli@quicinc.com>
This allows upper layers to learn about associated stations requesting
BSS transition management from the AP.
Signed-off-by: Chaoli Zhou <quic_zchaoli@quicinc.com>
Only the SME-in-hostapd case updated sta->ext_capability while the
SME-in-the-driver case updated sta->qos_map_enabled, but not other items
related to the extended capabilities. This resulted in reduced
information being available through the control interface.
Use the shared helper function for both cases to get matching
information available regardless of the SME architecture.
Signed-off-by: Chaoli Zhou <quic_zchaoli@quicinc.com>
dpp_configurator_params changes were taken into use in the
non-TCP/Controller case immediately on change, but that was not the case
for the Controller where this was updated only when explicitly starting
it. Change this to update dpp_configurator_params for the Controller as
well even if it is already running.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
PKEX Exchange Request handling in Controller used incorrect msg_ctx
pointer and that could result in event messages causing unexpected
behavior. Fix this by registering the correct msg_ctx pointer for these
cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
On radar detection on the main chain switch to the channel monitored
by the background chain if we have already performed the CAC there.
If a radar pattern is reported on the background chain, just select a
new random channel according to the regulations for monitoring.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Rely on hostapd_dfs_request_channel_switch() to enable CSA for
background radar detection switching back to the selected channel.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
This is a preliminary patch to add Channel Switch Announcement for
background radar detection.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Introduce the capability to perform radar/CAC detection on an offchannel
radar chain available on some hardware (e.g., mt7915). This feature
allows to avoid CAC downtime switching on a different channel during CAC
detection on the selected radar channel.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Allow background radar detection flag to be set when specifying a
channel. This is a preliminary change to introduce radar/CAC background
detection support.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Add the capability to specify all 3 channel type possibilities in
dfs_downgrade_bandwidth(). This is a preliminary change to introduce
radar/CAC background detection support.
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
RSA low-level routines were deprecated in OpenSSL 3.0.
EVP_PKEY_get_bits(), or its older and more backwards compatible name
EVP_PKEY_bits() can be used here instead.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() and EC_KEY_get0_group() were deprecated in
OpenSSL 3.0. Add a version of this by determining the group without
fetching the EC_KEY itself from an EVP_PKEY.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EC_GROUP_get_curve_GFp() was deprecated in OpenSSL 3.0.
EC_GROUP_get_curve() can be used to do the exact same thing. Add a
backwards compatibility wrapper for older OpenSSL versions to be able to
use this newer function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 3.0 deprecated EVP_PKEY_cmp() and replaced it with EVP_PKEY_eq()
which is not available in older versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There can be some discrepancy between the theorical dfs cac end (as
computed with the cac duration and cac start) and the actual cac end as
reported by the driver. During that window, the value of remaining time
outputed by the status command on the socket control interface will
display an overflowed, invalid value.
To mitigate this lets compute the remaining time as signed and display
it only when positive, otherwise defaulting it to 0.
Status command shows something like that when polling every seconds:
state=DFS
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=1
...
state=DFS
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=0
...
state=DFS
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=4294967294
...
state=DFS
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=4294967293
...
state=DFS
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=4294967292
...
state=ENABLED
cac_time_seconds=60
cac_time_left_seconds=N/A
Signed-off-by: Nicolas Escande <nico.escande@gmail.com>
The current code generates a warning when compiled by Clang, because if
we goto 'fail:', password_len can be uninitialised when we pass it in to
bin_clear_free().
Note that the actual usage is safe, because bin_clear_free() ignores
the second argument if the first argument is NULL, but it still seems
worth cleaning up.
Signed-off-by: Alasdair Mackintosh <alasdair at google.com>
This makes it easier for non-SOAP cases to validate HTTP server name
(from the URL) match against the certificate.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add QCA_WLAN_TWT_NOTIFY command type to send event to userspace when AP
changes TWT required bit field in its capabilities.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add support for new QCA nested attributes to pass the AFC channel
information as part of the external ACS request command,
EXTERNAL_ACS_EVENT_CHAN_INFO.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This is mainly for testing purposes to allow a Configurator to the curve
between provisioning cases. This would not work for real deployement
cases unless every Enrollee were reconfigured.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
DPP network introduction requires all devices to use the same curve for
netAccessKey. Enforce that this happens based on hardcoding the curve
based on the first successful configuration object generation if no
explicit configuration of the curve was used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This is not properly defined in the technical specification and will
need to be clarified there. Change the implementation to use a design
that is more likely to be used in the cleaned up tech spec.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Allow the Configurator to be configured to use a specific curve for the
netAccessKey so that it can request the Enrollee to generate a new key
during the configuration exchange to allow a compatible Connector to be
generated when the network uses a different curve than the protocol keys
used during the authentication exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The encoded CSR could have been leaked if another memory allocation were
to fail in this function. Use a shared return path to free the allocated
temporary buffers to avoid this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Extend dpp_test testing functionality to allow the Protocol Version
attribute to be removed or modified to invalid value in Reconfig
Authentication Request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Allow PKEX v1-only or v2-only behavior to be specific for the Responder
role. This is mainly for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to enable FFT recapture on user trigger.
Enable FFT recapture only when spectral scan period is greater than 52
us.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Allow the first Tunnel-Password RADIUS entry to be used for SAE in
addition to the sae_password entries and wpa_passphrase parameters from
the static configuration file.
Signed-off-by: Mario Hros <git@reversity.org>
Report background radar/CAC detection capability if supported
by the underlying driver/hardware.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Introduce type parameter to dfs_get_valid_channel() routine to allow
selection of a radar-only channel where the CAC detection has not been
performed yet. This is a preliminary patch to enable background
radar/CAC detection.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
This is a preliminary change to introduce radar/CAC background detection
support.
Tested-by: Owen Peng <owen.peng@mediatek.com>
Signed-off-by: Lorenzo Bianconi <lorenzo@kernel.org>
Do not use the first octet of the PPE Thresholds field without
explicitly confirming that that octet was included in the element.
Furthermore, allow the received element to have additional octets in the
end since IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 defines this to be an extensible
element and new fields could be added to the end of it in the future.
Fixes: 0497e41481 ("HE: Fix HE Capabilities element size")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The previously used calculation was not correct for the cases where the
extra padding field was needed. Fix this by properly calculating the
number of full octets in the field.
Fixes: 0497e41481 ("HE: Fix HE Capabilities element size")
Signed-off-by: Shiva Sankar Gajula <quic_sgajula@quicinc.com>
Couple of the WPS/P2P/RADIUS-PSK cases were freeing heap memory
allocations without explicitly clearing the PSK value. Add such clearing
for these to avoid leaving the PSK in memory after it is not needed
anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Unlike the other keys that were cleared here, the PMK is available
without FT support built into hostapd and as such, should be cleared in
all cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This makes it easier to scan process memory for key information that is
not supposed to remain there after the last use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The current operating frequency information was already cleared when
stopping other modes, but the cases for stopping AP mode were not
covered. Clear bss->freq in wpa_driver_nl80211_del_beacon() to cover
these cases. In addition, move clearing of bss->beacon_set there to
avoid having to clear that in all callers separately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add a NAN NDP attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_NDP_SERVICE_ID which
indicates service id with 6 bytes of length and it's derived from the
SHA-256 hash of the NAN service name. As per Wi-Fi Aware Specfication
version 3.2, this service ID is used to calculate the NAN PMK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Set the cipher suite for the link. Unlike the other parameters, this
needs to be done with the first rtnl_link_add() call (NLM_F_CREATE))
instead of the update in try_commit() since the kernel is rejecting
changes to the cipher suite after the link is first added.
Signed-off-by: leiwei <quic_leiwei@quicinc.com>
Allow macsec_csindex to be configured and select the cipher suite when
the participant acts as a key server.
Signed-off-by: leiwei <quic_leiwei@quicinc.com>
If the TX frame operation does not request any wait time, there is not
going to be any pending wait that could be cancelled later. As such,
there is no need to store the cookie value for these cases. This removes
unnecessary cancel-TX-wait operations that would result in some extra
latency and confusing debug log entries.
This was found with the following hwsim test case sequence where the
second test was failing due to the extra latency and this commit gets
rid of that failure:
rrm_ftm_range_req_timeout dpp_qr_code_auth_neg_chan
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
drv->send_frame_cookies[] was already cleared, but
dev->send_frame_cookie was not. This resulted in unnecessary attempts of
canceling the TX wait for a wait that had already expired. While this
does not really result in real issues, it is cleaner to get rid of the
error messages from the debug log by skipping the unnecessary
operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add the enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_pcl elements to mark the maximum value
of the defined attributes for the preferred channel list. This is
helpful for nla_parse().
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <quic_ssramya@quicinc.com>
That wpa_supplicant header file is not needed for driver_atheros.c and
maybe was never really needed, so do not include it here to avoid
potentially conflicting C preprocessor defines.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This is helpful for understanding why an assocation attempt takes
unexpectedly long time to complete.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Check driver support for SA Query offload in AP mode and skip starting
SA Query timer on CSA for OCV enabled STAs when the driver indicates
support for offloading SA Query procedures.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This brings in nl80211 definitions as of 2022-01-04. In addition, update
nl80211_command_to_string() to cover the new defined commands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_MCC_QUOTA. When two or more interfaces are
active on the same band and two different home channels (MCC), the
target may allocate quota of "on channel" time for each home channel.
The target will indicate the quota information to application layer with
this event. Application may do TX bitrate control based on the
information. The user may also set the MCC quota for an interface by
using this command.
Signed-off-by: Liangwei Dong <quic_liangwei@quicinc.com>
Signed-off-by: Madhvapathi Sriram <quic_msriram@quicinc.com>
Introduce a new vendor command
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_RATEMASK_CONFIG. This is used to set the rate
mask config to be used in MCS rate selection per PHY type.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Currently the moderate latency level is not used. Rename the moderate
latency level to XR latency level to be used in XR (extended reality)
applications.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Not doing this was resulting in test failures with many sequences of a
mesh test case (e.g., wpas_mesh_peer_connected) followed by
ap_csa_1_switch which was checking the driver wrapper frequency
information at the beginning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
DPP Enrollee might wait for the configuration for 60 seconds, so
increase the DPP Configurator timeout for the GAS server operation to 60
seconds to cover that full wait time. This is needed for cases where
user interaction can take significant amount of time before the
configuration response can be generated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This can be helpful in figuring out when the driver has stopped waiting
on a specific channel and would need a remain-on-channel command to
continue listening on that channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This provides an alternative mechanism for upper layer components to
control configuration parameters to be used by the local Configurator.
Instead of the previously used design where the Configurator parameters
had to be provided before initiating the DPP Authentication exchange,
the new alternative approach allows the DPP Authentication exchange to
be started before any Configurator parameters have been determined and
wpa_supplicant will then request the parameters once the DPP
Configuration Request has been received from the Enrollee. This allows
the Config Request information to be used at upper layers to determine
how the Enrollee should be configured.
For example for an Initiator:
CTRL: DPP_QR_CODE <URI from Responder/Enrollee>
CTRL: DPP_AUTH_INIT peer=1 conf=query
<3>DPP-CONF-NEEDED peer=1 src=02:00:00:00:00:00 net_role=sta name="Test" opclass=81,82,83,84,115,116,117,118,119,120,121,122,123,124,125,126,127,128,129,130 mud_url=N/A
(upper layer processing; potentially including user interaction)
CTRL: DPP_CONF_SET peer=1 conf=sta-sae ssid=736165 pass=70617373776f7264
<3>DPP-CONF-SENT
For example for a Responder:
CTRL: SET dpp_configurator_params conf=query
CTRL: DPP_LISTEN 2412 role=configurator
<3>DPP-CONF-NEEDED peer=2 src=02:00:00:00:01:00 net_role=sta name="Test" opclass=81,82,83,84,115,116,117,118,119,120,121,122,123,124,125,126,127,128,129,130 mud_url=N/A
(upper layer processing; potentially including user interaction)
CTRL: DPP_CONF_SET peer=2 conf=sta-sae ssid=736165 pass=70617373776f7264
<3>DPP-CONF-SENT
For example for an Initiator that can act both as a Configurator and an
Enrollee in a case where the Initiator becomes the Enrollee:
CTRL: DPP_AUTH_INIT peer=1 role=either conf=query
<3>DPP-CONF-RECEIVED
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Extend the GAS server functionality to allow a request handler to return
the initial comeback delay with a later callback instead of having to
indicate the comeback delay when returning from the handler function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This is for testing purposes to allow a station mode associated to be
dropped without sending the AP a Deauthentication frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The TCP code path did not handle the postponed connection attempt on TX
status and the following result message from the Enrollee to the
Configurator. Fix this by adding TCP-versions of these operations to
match the way wpa_supplicant implemented this for the Public Action
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This extends dpp_test functionality to allow DPP Network Introduction
exchanges to use an incorrect value in the Protocol Version attribute.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Use a separate ver=<1|2> parameter to DPP_PKEX_ADD instead of
overloading init=1 with version indication. This allows additional
options for forcing v1-only and v2-only in addition to automatic mode
(start with v2 and fall back to v1, if needed).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
This extends hostapd with the design used in wpa_supplicant for PKEX
initiator retries and automatic version fallback from v2 to v1 (the
latter is enabled only with CONFIG_DPP3=y).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Report TX status for DPP messages even if the destination address was
broadcast. This is needed to get appropriate trigger for PKEX retries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
The rx_freq of Public Action frame was not maintained by the GO and the
GO always sent the response on the operating channel. This causes
provision discovery failure when a P2P Device is sending a PD Request on
a 2.4 GHz social channel and the GO is responding on a 5 GHz operating
channel.
Save the rx_freq and use it for GO to sent the response. This extends
commit c5cc7a59ac ("Report offchannel RX frame frequency to hostapd")
to cover additional frame types.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Extend the peer queue flush command with following attributes
1. Enable to flush per TID peer queue
2. Enable to configure when to flush the peer/TID queue
Signed-off-by: Madhvapathi Sriram <quic_msriram@quicinc.com>
Replace the word "blacklist" with the inclusive word "denylist" and add
aliases for backward compatibility.
Signed-off-by: Arowa Suliman <arowa@chromium.org>
Replace the word "whitelist" with the inclusive word "allowlist" and add
aliases for backward compatibility.
Signed-off-by: Arowa Suliman <arowa@chromium.org>
Update the version number for the build and also add the ChangeLog
entries for both hostapd and wpa_supplicant to describe main changes
between v2.9 and v2.10.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The crypto_ec_point_solve_y_coord() wrapper function might not use
constant time operations in the crypto library and as such, could leak
side channel information about the password that is used to generate the
PWE in the hunting and pecking loop. As such, calculate the two possible
y coordinate values and pick the correct one to use with constant time
selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The crypto_ec_point_solve_y_coord() wrapper function might not use
constant time operations in the crypto library and as such, could leak
side channel information about the password that is used to generate the
PWE in the hunting and pecking loop. As such, calculate the two possible
y coordinate values and pick the correct one to use with constant time
selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This implementation within SSWU can be helpful for other users of the
dragonfly design, so move it into a shared helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a QCA vendor netlink interface to start/stop periodic TSF sync
feature and also support configuration of interval value as part of TSF
sync start command. In addition, improve documentation for the related
attributes and values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_EHT_ENABLED flag attribute to conduct ACS
for EHT mode. The driver can consider EHT specific parameters such as
puncture pattern for ACS when this flag attribute is indicated by
userspace.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <quic_vjakkam@quicinc.com>
OpenSSL 3.0 dropped these older TLS versions from the security level 2
to 1, so need to drop the security level all the way to 0 if TLS v1.0 or
v1.1 is explicitly enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
It looks like EC_KEY_set_conv_form() for the EC_KEY within the EVP_PKEY
does not take effect for i2d_PUBKEY() with OpenSSL 3.0, so allocate a
new wrapper EVP_PKEY after the conversion format change to be able to
return the correctly encoded (compressed) value here. This is required
for DPP to work correctly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Number of the older algorithms have now been moved into a separate
provider in OpenSSL 3.0 and they are not available by default.
Explicitly load the legacy provider when such an algorithm is needed for
the first time.
In addition, at least for now, load the legacy providers when initiating
TLS context to maintain existing functionality for various private key
formats.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Use get1 whenever actually modifying the EC_KEY parameters and mark the
variable used with get0 const to be compatible with OpenSSL 3.0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add additional attributes in
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_AVOID_FREQUENCY_EXT vendor sub command to
avoid usage of unsafe frequencies on wifi interfaces sent from userspace
to the driver/firmware. The driver/firmware shall use restrictions and
power cap accordingly to restrict the usage of these frequencies on
operating interface(s).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
hostapd should update Supported Channel Width Set of HT Capability
Information field after channel switching done. Otherwise, it would
continue to use the old setting.
Signed-off-by: peterhuang <peterhuang@realtek.com>
Because ieee80211ac and ieee80211ax were not updated before channel
switch is done, hostapd didn't build the Channel Switch Wrapper element
when it switched from HT to bandwidth more than 40 MHz of VHT/HE. fix
this by allowing hostapd_eid_wb_chsw_wrapper() to determine internally
when the element needs to be added based on the new channel instead of
the old configuration.
Signed-off-by: peterhuang <peterhuang@realtek.com>
hostapd will build wrong beacon_after in hostapd_fill_csa_settings() if
it doesn't update ieee80211ac when channel switching.
Signed-off-by: peterhuang <peterhuang@realtek.com>
Allow mesh_fwding (dot11MeshForwarding) to be specified in a mesh BSS
config, pass that to the driver (only nl80211 implemented for now) and
announce forwarding capability accordingly.
Signed-off-by: José Pekkarinen <jose.pekkarinen@unikie.com>
Signed-off-by: Daniel Golle <daniel@makrotopia.org>
If min_tx_power is specified (default 0 dBm, i.e., no constraint), ACS
and DFS will not consider channels whose available max_tx_power is less
than the configured value.
This may be useful to exclude SRD (Short Range Device) channels which
may be limited to 13.9 dBm (25 mW) in some regulatory domains.
Signed-off-by: Alan Young <consult.awy@gmail.com>
This reverts commit 3af78a4e04.
This commit prepares a refactor for another patch, which is being
reverted.
Signed-off-by: Matthew Wang <matthewmwang@chromium.org>
Add support for PKEXv2 core protocol. This defines a new PKEX Exchange
Request message type with protocol negotiation and different rules for
key derivation with PKEXv2 or newer is used.
This does not change existing behavior for PKEX, i.e., the PKEXv1
variant will still be used by default.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Allow the dpp_test parameter to be used to request the Protocol Version
attributed to be omitted from the Peer Discovery Request/Response
message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Verify that the Protocol Version attribute is used appropriate in Peer
Discovery Request/Response messages in cases where the signed Connector
includes the version information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Generate Peer Discovery Request/Response messages using the protected
version from the Connector, if present, instead of the currently
supported protocol version which might be higher than the one that got
included into the signed Connector during provisioning earlier.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Indicate the protocol version number that the Enrollee used during the
DPP exchange that resulted in the generation of the Connector.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
CONFIG_DPP3=y can now be used to configure hostapd and wpa_supplicant
builds to include DPP version 3 functionality. This functionality is
still under design and the implementation is experimental and not
suitable to be enabled in production uses before the specification has
been finalized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <quic_jouni@quicinc.com>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to indicate the puncture pattern derived
by the automatic channel selection algorithm.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Reduced neighbor report has a field to indicate whether unsolicited
Probe Response transmission is active. Add a check to return failure if
both FILS discovery and unsolicited Probe Response are enabled at the
same time to ensure that RNR includes valid data.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
When a Probe Request frame from a station includes an SSID matching that
of a co-located 6 GHz AP, AP should respond with a Probe Response frame
that includes Reduced Neighbor Report element containing information
regarding the requested BSS.
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Update 2.4/5 GHz Beacon frames every time Beacon frames for co-located 6
GHz AP(s) are set. This is required for 6 GHz out-of-band discovery so
that lower band Beacon frames will include RNR element with 6 GHz AP
information irrespective of the AP bring-up order. Similarly, RNR is
included in FILS Discovery frames by default in 6 GHz-only mode,
updating the Beacon frames will remove it when co-located 2.4/5 GHz
interfaces are brought up.
This change also ensures that the changes in 6 GHz AP configuration such
as new channel and bandwidth get reflected in the lower bands Beacon
frames.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Add Reduced Neighbor Report element in Beacon, Probe Response, and FILS
Discovery frames.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Include Reduced Neighbor Report element in Beacon and Probe Response
frames by default if the reporting AP is 2.4/5 GHz and it is co-located
with a 6 GHz AP. Similarly, include RNR by default in FILS Discovery
frames if the AP is a standalone 6 GHz AP.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Co-developed-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Calculate the length and include data for the BSSes active on the same
radio as the reporting BSS in the Reduced Neighbor Report element. This
element is included in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Co-developed-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
Co-developed-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Co-developed-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Include data from the existing neighbor database in the Reduced Neighbor
Report element in Beacon frames if the configuration option 'rnr' is
enabled for the BSS.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Co-developed-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Adds configuration option 'rnr' to enable the reduced neighbor report
elements in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Add definitions for the fields described in IEEE Std 802.11-2020 and
IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021, 9.4.2.170 Reduced Neighbor Report element.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Add a new field to include BSS Parameter subfield in the neighbor
database as described in IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021, Figure 9-632a (BSS
Parameters subfield format). This field holds information related to
multiple BSSID, access point co-location, and 20 TU probe response
active/inactive state.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Calculate and store short SSID in hostapd_data context during config
load time and in neighbor report.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
OpenSSL 1.0.2 did not define the 'bytes' argument to
X509_NAME_add_entry_by_NID() to be const like it did for the previously
used X509_NAME_add_entry_by_txt(). Add a backwards compatible version of
this call to avoid compilation issues.
Fixes: d51939f2c4 ("DPP: Move CSR routines to use crypto.h")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
As BoringSSL version of i2d_PUBKEY() doesn't respect the
POINT_CONVERSION_COMPRESSED flag redefine a specific
crypto_ec_key_get_subject_public_key() version for BoringSSL based on
dpp_bootstrap_key_der().
The only other user of crypto_ec_key_get_subject_public_key() is SAE-PK
for which the public key should also be formatted using compressed
format.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Use crypto.h API to implement ECDH in DPP. This needs a new
initialization function in crypto.h to initialize an ECDH with a given
EC key.
Using crypto_ecdh_set_peerkey() to generate the ECDH secret in an
intermediate and dynamically allocated buffer removed the need for the
DPP-specific workaround for inconsistent length returned by
EVP_PKEY_derive() since that crypto_ecdh_set_peerkey() implementation
already had functionality for covering the changing secret_len value
from commit d001fe31ab ("OpenSSL: Handle EVP_PKEY_derive() secret_len
changes for ECDH").
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
In case the public key was not included in the EC private key ASN.1
sequence, the flag that was cleared was not the right one. Fix this by
using EC_KEY_set_enc_flags() for both setting and clearing the
EC_PKEY_NO_PUBKEY flag instead of trying to clear that with the
unrelated EC_KEY_clear_flags() function.
Fixes: 2d5772e691 ("DPP: Factorize conversion to ASN.1 ECPrivateKey")
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
/usr/bin/ld: /home/honma/git/hostap/build/wpa_supplicant/src/wps/wps.o: in function `wps_deinit':
/home/honma/git/hostap/wpa_supplicant/../src/wps/wps.c:184: undefined reference to `dh5_free'
/usr/bin/ld: /home/honma/git/hostap/build/wpa_supplicant/src/wps/wps_common.o: in function `wps_derive_keys':
/home/honma/git/hostap/wpa_supplicant/../src/wps/wps_common.c:83: undefined reference to `dh5_derive_shared'
/usr/bin/ld: /home/honma/git/hostap/wpa_supplicant/../src/wps/wps_common.c:84: undefined reference to `dh5_free'
/usr/bin/ld: /home/honma/git/hostap/build/wpa_supplicant/src/wps/wps_attr_build.o: in function `wps_build_public_key':
/home/honma/git/hostap/wpa_supplicant/../src/wps/wps_attr_build.c:68: undefined reference to `dh5_free'
/usr/bin/ld: /home/honma/git/hostap/wpa_supplicant/../src/wps/wps_attr_build.c:69: undefined reference to `dh5_init'
collect2: error: ld returned 1 exit status
make: *** [Makefile:1892: wpa_supplicant] Error 1
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Keep the locally defined ASN.1 sequence DPP_BOOTSTRAPPING_KEY for now to
avoid losing a workaround for BoringSSL from commit 746c1792ac ("DPP:
Build bootstrapping key DER encoding using custom routine").
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Instead of generating EC point with random coordinates, generate a
valid EC point and then corrupt the coordinates after exporting them
in binary format.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Remove one more direct call to OpenSSL using crypto_ec_key_group() to
compare group of c-sign-key and ppKey when creating Configurator from
backup data.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Rewrite functions related to reconfig feature using EC point/bignum
primitives defined in crypto.h API.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Add two new functions in crypto.h that "wrap" around already defined
signing function with (r,s) interface instead of DER Ecdsa-Sig-Value.
Using those functions implies to compute the hash to sign manually
before.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Rewrite dpp_auth_derive_l_responder/initiator() using EC point/bignum
primitives defined in crypto.h API.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Rewrite EC point/bignum computation done in PKEX protocol using EC
point/bignum primitives already defined in crypto.h and couple of small
new helper functions.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Function crypto_ec_key_parse_priv() already parses ASN.1 ECPrivateKey so
use it when possible.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
The extra validation steps through the OpenSSL X509 API are not really
necessary here and they most duplicate checks that happen implicitly
within d2i_PUBKEY() and the EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() checks in
crypto_ec_key_parse_pub().
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Move code of dpp_set_pubkey_point_group() into crypto.h API. This
function initializes an EC public key using coordinates of the EC point
in binary format.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Move code of dpp_get_pubkey_point() to a crypto library specific
function crypto_ec_key_get_pubkey_point().
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Add crypto_ec_key_get_ecprivate_key() function in crypto.h and use it
when possible in DPP code.
This function converts a struct crypto_ec_key into a DER encoded ASN.1
ECPrivateKey.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
To remove direct dependency to OpenSSL in DPP replace EVP_PKEY
by struct crypto_ec_key in all structures and function prototypes.
All direct calls to EVP_PKEY_free() are replaced by calls to
crypto_ec_key_deinit().
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Remove definition of struct crypto_ec_key and directly cast struct
crypto_ec_key * to EVP_PKEY * (and vice versa).
Indeed EVP_PKEY already has a pointer to EC_KEY and removing this
intermediate structure allows smoother transition in removing direct
OpenSSL dependency in DPP.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Commit b0f457b619 ("SAE: Do not expire the current PMKSA cache entry")
depends on sm->cur_pmksa to determine if it is the current PMKSA cache
entry, but sm->cur_pmksa was not always correct for SAE in the current
implementation.
Set sm->cur_pmksa in wpa_sm_set_pmk() (which is used with SAE), and skip
clearing of sm->cur_pmksa for SAE in wpa_find_assoc_pmkid(). This latter
case was added by commit c2080e8657 ("Clear current PMKSA cache
selection on association/roam") for driver-based roaming indication and
Suite B, so skipping it for SAE should be fine.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SCAN_PRIORITY to configure the
priority of vendor scan relative to other scan requests. Add the valid
values that this attribute can take.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The original code wants to remove # comments unless they are within a
double quoted string, but it doesn’t consider the "" after #, for
example in the following line: a=b #"a=c"
Signed-off-by: xinpeng wang <wangxinpeng@uniontech.com>
Processing of usec could result in an additional +1 increment to sec and
that might overflow. Extend the previously used overflow check to cover
this special case as well.
Signed-off-by: xinpeng wang <wangxinpeng@uniontech.com>
Adds the ability to specify the dialog token of a WNM BSS Transition
Management Request frame via the hostapd control interface.
For this, the new 'dialog_token' option can be used with the BSS_TM_REQ
command. It accepts values as an 8 bit unsigned integer. If not
specified, the dialog token is set to 1 like before.
Signed-off-by: David Bauer <mail@david-bauer.net>
These code paths on the Controller were calling dpp_connection_remove()
twice for the same connection in the error cases. That would result in
double-freeing of the memory, so fix this by remove the
dpp_connection_remove() call from the called function and instead,
remove the connection in dpp_controller_rx() error handling.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Stop the DPP Controller instance, if one is started, when the hostapd
interface that was used to start that Controller is removed. This is
needed to remove the control pointers that point to the soon-to-be-freed
hostapd structures. This fixes an issue where a Controller operation
with multiple interfaces could have resulted in references to freed
memory if an interface is removed without explicitly stopping the DPP
Controller.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use the new nss_macsec_secy_id_get() function, if available, instead of
the hardcoded ifname to secy_id mapping.
Signed-off-by: leiwei <leiwei@codeaurora.org>
The disable_dgaf config field is only available in case hostapd is
compiled with Hotspot 2.0 support (CONFIG_HS20=y), however Proxy-ARP
(CONFIG_PROXYARP=y) does not depend on Hotspot 2.0.
Only add the code related to this config field when Hotspot 2.0 is
enabled to fix compilation with the aformentioned preconditions.
Signed-off-by: David Bauer <mail@david-bauer.net>
There is no convenient mechanism for reauthenticating and generating a
new PMK during an association with SAE. As such, forced PMK update would
mean having to disassociate and reauthenticate which is not really
desired especially when the default PMKLifetime is only 12 hours.
Postpone PMKSA cache entry expiration of the currently used entry with
SAE until the association is lost. In addition, do not try to force the
EAPOL state machine to perform reauthentication for SAE since that won't
work.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update PMKSA cache when interface is disabled and then enabled based on
the new MAC address. If the new MAC address is same as the previous MAC
address, the PMKSA cache entries are valid and hence update the PMKSA
cache entries to the driver. If the new MAC address is not same as the
previous MAC address, the PMKSA cache entries will not be valid anymore
and hence delete the PMKSA cache entries.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
While creating a cloned PMKSA entry for OKC both expiration and
reauth_time values are set to maximum values, but later only the
expiration time is copied from the old PMKSA entry to the new PMKSA
entry. Due to this there is a possibility of reauth_time becoming
greater than expiration time in some cloned entries. To avoid this copy
reauth_time also to the cloned entry.
Also, add check to reject control interface commands with reauth time
greater than expiration time.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Replaced the word "sanity" with the inclusive word "validity". The
comment in acs_survey_interference_factor() was referring a function
that does not exist, so remove it instead of trying rename the function.
Signed-off-by: Arowa Suliman <arowa@chromium.org>
Existing logic to disable HE in hostapd_set_freq_params() is to check
he_cap != NULL, but this is not correct as he_cap is defined as a stack
member of hostapd_hw_modes which can't be NULL. Add one more check
!he_cap->he_supported to make sure HE can be disabled if the driver not
support it.
This fixes a case where a driver does not support HE, but hostapd.conf
enables HE/HT40 on the 2.4 GHz band and hostapd failed to start with
error '40 MHz channel width is not supported in 2.4 GHz'.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to indicate agile spectral scan support for
320 MHz mode. Add another attribute to indicate the number of detectors
used for spectral scan in 320 MHz mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduce a new vendor command QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_ROAM_EVENTS
that aims to configure/trigger the roam events from the driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an explicit check for msg->channel_list != NULL instead of depending
on msg->channel_list_len > 0 implying that. This is to silence invalid
static analyzer reports.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Indicate DSCP Policy capability by including a WFA Capabilities element
containing the relevant bit set to 1 in the (Re)Association Request
frames when enabled by user.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Add support to parse received DSCP Policy Request frames and send the
request details as control interface events.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Commit 0cb39f4fd5 ("HE: Extend BSS color support") sets the BSS Color
default value to 1 as "Interoperability testing showed that stations
will require a BSS color to be set even if the feature is disabled."
A new interop issue was observed with hardcoded BSS color value of 1:
- REF device using one interface (e.g., wlan0) to connect to an HE
AP, whose BSS color is enabled and value is 1.
- REF device using another interface (e.g., p2p0) to connect to a
P2P GO using BSS color default settings.
(i.e., BSS color disabled and value is 1).
- REF device checks both AP's and P2P GO's BSS Color values even though
GO's BSS color is disabled. This causes collision of the BSS
color somehow causing RX problems.
For DUT as a P2P GO, its firmware uses default BSS color value 1 from
wpa_supplicant, then triggers a timer (e.g., 120 s) to update its BSS
color values based on its neighboring BSSes. To reduce the likelihood of
BSS color collision with REF device before that, use a random BSS Color
if not defined in the config file.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This new vendor command aims to indicate the driver to enable the
monitor mode for an interface on which this command is issued. Once
enabled, the frames (both TX and RX) on this interface are sent to an
active coexisting monitor interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new attributes for supporting MBSSID multi groups notifications
to qca_wlan_vendor_attr_mbssid_tx_vdev_status
(QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_MBSSID_TX_VDEV_STATUS).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
QCA_ROAM_REASON_USER_TRIGGER was wrongly documented as
QCA_ROAM_REASON_EXPLICIT_REQUEST, so correct it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Enhance the P2P_GROUP_ADD command to support DFS channel with 80 and 160
MHz bandwidth to be used for autonomous GO when using offloaded DFS.
For example, 'P2P_GROUP_ADD freq=5500 max_oper_chwidth=80 ht40 vht'
- Previous behavior: AP fallback to channel 100 using 20 MHz with
"No VHT higher bandwidth support for the selected channel 100"
- Enhanced behavior: AP starts on channel 100 using 80 MHz with
"VHT center channel 106 for 80 or 80+80 MHz bandwidth"
This functionality is on top of the driver's capability to offload DFS,
which is advertized through WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_DFS_OFFLOAD.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor interface support for configuring background scan related
parameters to the driver/firmware.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit 45c3e72952 ("Add frequency to operating class determination
for 5 GHz 100..140") extends ieee80211_freq_to_channel_ext() with
knowledge of the operating classes for the 5 GHz channels 100..140.
Per "Table E-4 - Global operating classes" in IEEE Std 802.11-2020, 5
GHz channel 144 also maps to same operating classes, so update hostapd
code to reflect the change.
This issue is found when OCV enabled and 4-way-handshake failed due
to client OCI includes op_class 0 for channel 144. This showed
up in following manner in the debug log:
WPA: OCI KDE in EAPOL-Key - hexdump(len=9): dd 07 00 0f ac 0d 00 90 00
Error interpreting OCI: unrecognized opclass/channel pair (0/144)
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
Enable support for P2P connection in 6 GHz with the channel width of 40
MHz, 80 MHz, and 160 MHz. The flag max_oper_chwidth is used to configure
the maximum channel width for P2P connection in 6 GHz with the commands
P2P_CONNECT, P2P_INVITE, and P2P_GROUP_ADD.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Current definition of wpas_p2p_get_ht40_mode() determines secondary
offset in the 5 GHz band. Enhance the functionality of this function to
determine offset to support 6 GHz channels also.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Add a new attribute into qca_wlan_vendor_attr_ll_stats_results to
support getting interface time slicing duty cycle info.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Channel 100 is a valid channel to choose for 80 MHz operation. However,
it was converted to 5500 MHz, not 5550 MHz, for the 80 MHz case while
the conversion to other bandwidths was done correctly. In fact, there is
no channel assigned to this frequency 5550 MHz.
Fix this obvious typo to allow ACS to select channel 100 for 80 MHz
operation again.
Fixes: bef5eee4f7 ("Convert channel to frequency based selection for AP mode ACS")
Signed-off-by: David Bauer <mail@david-bauer.net>
Align the p2p_buf_add_pref_channel_list() prototype and definition in
p2p_build.c and p2p_i.h. Use unsigned int over u32 as it is actully
called with an unsigned int parameter.
This removes compilation warning on platform where u32 != unsigned int.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 added channel 177 into global operating class 125
and consequently channel 173 in global operating class 126 (HT40+) and
channel 177 in global operating class 127 (HT40-).
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Skip the test of HE PHY capability bit "Support for a 40 MHz and 80 MHz
channel width" when starting an AP with a 20 MHz channel on the 5 GHz
band.
Signed-off-by: Cedric Izoard <cedric.izoard@ceva-dsp.com>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver/firmware the allowed
bands for roaming by userpace. This attribute is also used to get the
configured roam bands from the driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use monitor interface to send_mlme only when the interface is configured
in AP mode. In multiple interface setup, one interface can be configured
in AP mode using monitor interface and another interface in station
mode. The station interface may also require sending the management
frames without using monitor interface, e.g., support external SAE
authentication to send Authentication frames without monitor interface.
This change allows sending management frames to the driver for a station
interface where the AP interface uses monitor interface.
Additionally, the monitor interface is only valid for AP mode
(nl80211_create_monitor_interface() is called in nl80211_setup_ap) so
interface type check ensures to use monitor interface only when required
by the specific interface.
Signed-off-by: Ajay Singh <ajay.kathat@microchip.com>
Signed-off-by: Peter Reen <peter.reen@microchip.com>
For the function hostapd_get_sta_tx_rx(), the name
hostapd_get_sta_info() is more appropriate as it is also responsible for
getting many other STA specific params like RSSI, inactive milliseconds
along with TX and RX bytes.
Signed-off-by: Gokul Sivakumar <gokulkumar792@gmail.com>
When a Mesh interface is managed by wpa_supplicant, include the peer
link connected time (secs) in the output of "sta <addr>", "all_sta"
wpa_cli cmds for each peer. This will be helpful to find when the peer
link connection got established. The NL80211_STA_INFO_CONNECTED_TIME
netlink attribute data is used for this purpose if available.
$ wpa_cli -i mesh0 all_sta
02:00:00:00:02:00
flags=[ASSOC][WMM][HT]
aid=1
capability=0x0
listen_interval=0
supported_rates=82 84 8b 96 8c 12 98 24 b0 48 60 6c
timeout_next=NULLFUNC POLL
rx_packets=77
tx_packets=3
rx_bytes=8510
tx_bytes=284
inactive_msec=104
signal=-30
rx_rate_info=65 mcs 0
tx_rate_info=65 mcs 0
ht_mcs_bitmask=ffff0000000000000000
connected_time=24
ht_caps_info=0x103c
The connected_time field in the output of "hostapd_cli -i ap0 all_sta"
cmd is not affected and it will continue to show the connected time
maintained by hostapd for each STA.
Signed-off-by: Gokul Sivakumar <gokulkumar792@gmail.com>
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c: In function ‘pasn_wd_handle_sae_commit’:
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:2401:60: warning: format ‘%lu’ expects argument of type ‘long unsigned int’, but argument 3 has type ‘size_t’ {aka ‘unsigned int’} [-Wformat=]
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "PASN: SAE buffer too short. len=%lu",
~~^
%u
buf_len);
~~~~~~~
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c: In function ‘pasn_wd_handle_sae_confirm’:
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:2477:60: warning: format ‘%lu’ expects argument of type ‘long unsigned int’, but argument 3 has type ‘size_t’ {aka ‘unsigned int’} [-Wformat=]
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "PASN: SAE buffer too short. len=%lu",
~~^
%u
buf_len);
~~~~~~~
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c: In function ‘pasn_wd_handle_fils’:
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:2707:62: warning: format ‘%lu’ expects argument of type ‘long unsigned int’, but argument 3 has type ‘size_t’ {aka ‘unsigned int’} [-Wformat=]
wpa_printf(MSG_DEBUG, "PASN: FILS: Buffer too short. len=%lu",
~~^
%u
buf_len);
~~~~~~~
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
The number of nlctrl name resolution calls required to connect to a
WPA2-PSK AP is 12. And each nlctrl name resolution call spends 55 micro
seconds on a lower spec CPU like Intel Atom N270. Reduce the number of
nctrl name resolution calls from 12 to 1 by caching the results of nctrl
name resolution calls on int size memory to speed up the connection
process a little bit.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Try to parse the private_key blob as private key in PEM format encoded
PKCS#8. PEM format is already supported for private_key file and is now
also supported for private_key blob.
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Steinwender <wsteinwender@pcs.com>
Generate an event on the control socket interface when a network is
added or removed. The event name CTRL-EVENT-NETWORK-<ADDED|REMOVED>
is followed by the network entry identifier. The event matches the
corresponding Network<Added|Removed> signal on the d-bus interface.
Signed-off-by: Andrew Beltrano <anbeltra@microsoft.com>
==19798==ERROR: AddressSanitizer: heap-use-after-free on address 0x6110000663f8 at pc 0x55a2c485a232 bp 0x7ffeb42dcaf0 sp 0x7ffeb42dcae0
READ of size 8 at 0x6110000663f8 thread T0
Connect STA wlan0 to AP
#0 0x55a2c485a231 in ptksa_cache_add ../src/common/ptksa_cache.c:310
#1 0x55a2c4398045 in hostapd_store_ptksa ../src/ap/wpa_auth_glue.c:943
#2 0x55a2c4430980 in wpa_auth_store_ptksa ../src/ap/wpa_auth.c:232
#3 0x55a2c44578e1 in sm_WPA_PTK_PTKINITDONE_Enter ../src/ap/wpa_auth.c:3650
#4 0x55a2c44578e1 in sm_WPA_PTK_Step ../src/ap/wpa_auth.c:3798
#5 0x55a2c44578e1 in wpa_sm_step ../src/ap/wpa_auth.c:4437
#6 0x55a2c445d99d in wpa_receive ../src/ap/wpa_auth.c:1411
#7 0x55a2c43e7747 in ieee802_1x_receive ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:1118
#8 0x55a2c43bbf73 in hostapd_event_eapol_rx ../src/ap/drv_callbacks.c:1542
#9 0x55a2c43bbf73 in wpa_supplicant_event ../src/ap/drv_callbacks.c:1932
#10 0x55a2c466cb2d in drv_event_eapol_rx ../src/drivers/driver.h:6074
#11 0x55a2c466cb2d in nl80211_control_port_frame ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211_event.c:2822
#12 0x55a2c466cb2d in process_bss_event ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211_event.c:3194
#13 0x7feed9e90b9b in nl_cb_call ./include/netlink-private/netlink.h:145
#14 0x7feed9e90b9b in recvmsgs ./lib/nl.c:1006
#15 0x7feed9e90b9b in nl_recvmsgs_report ./lib/nl.c:1057
#16 0x7feed9e91058 in nl_recvmsgs ./lib/nl.c:1081
#17 0x55a2c45f2e8c in wpa_driver_nl80211_event_receive ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211.c:1782
#18 0x55a2c44b9afa in eloop_sock_table_dispatch ../src/utils/eloop.c:603
#19 0x55a2c44be122 in eloop_run ../src/utils/eloop.c:1228
#20 0x55a2c43360bf in hostapd_global_run /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/main.c:451
#21 0x55a2c43360bf in main /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/main.c:898
#22 0x7feed8ce20b2 in __libc_start_main (/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/libc.so.6+0x270b2)
#23 0x55a2c432f3fd in _start (/home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/hostapd+0x9f23fd)
0x6110000663f8 is located 184 bytes inside of 216-byte region [0x611000066340,0x611000066418)
freed by thread T0 here:
#0 0x7feeda1477cf in __interceptor_free (/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/libasan.so.5+0x10d7cf)
#1 0x55a2c44ce56b in os_free ../src/utils/os_unix.c:773
#2 0x55a2c451a986 in radius_msg_free ../src/radius/radius.c:137
#3 0x55a2c4527104 in radius_client_msg_free ../src/radius/radius_client.c:261
#4 0x55a2c452f53c in radius_client_list_add ../src/radius/radius_client.c:715
#5 0x55a2c452f53c in radius_client_send ../src/radius/radius_client.c:807
#6 0x55a2c453b24c in accounting_sta_report ../src/ap/accounting.c:352
#7 0x55a2c453d6e9 in accounting_sta_stop ../src/ap/accounting.c:384
#8 0x55a2c44190fd in ap_free_sta ../src/ap/sta_info.c:194
#9 0x55a2c4934530 in handle_deauth ../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:6035
#10 0x55a2c4934530 in ieee802_11_mgmt ../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:6399
#11 0x55a2c43bf114 in hostapd_mgmt_rx ../src/ap/drv_callbacks.c:1468
#12 0x55a2c43bf114 in wpa_supplicant_event ../src/ap/drv_callbacks.c:1912
#13 0x55a2c465faf7 in mlme_event_mgmt ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211_event.c:823
#14 0x55a2c4661774 in mlme_event ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211_event.c:1135
#15 0x55a2c466c43b in process_bss_event ../src/drivers/driver_nl80211_event.c:3177
#16 0x7feed9e90b9b in nl_cb_call ./include/netlink-private/netlink.h:145
#17 0x7feed9e90b9b in recvmsgs ./lib/nl.c:1006
#18 0x7feed9e90b9b in nl_recvmsgs_report ./lib/nl.c:1057
previously allocated by thread T0 here:
#0 0x7feeda147bc8 in malloc (/usr/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/libasan.so.5+0x10dbc8)
#1 0x55a2c44cd387 in os_malloc ../src/utils/os_unix.c:715
#2 0x55a2c44ceb7f in os_zalloc ../src/utils/os_unix.c:779
#3 0x55a2c451a9f2 in radius_msg_new ../src/radius/radius.c:109
#4 0x55a2c4539a6e in accounting_msg ../src/ap/accounting.c:46
#5 0x55a2c453be15 in accounting_report_state ../src/ap/accounting.c:439
#6 0x55a2c453d91d in accounting_init ../src/ap/accounting.c:534
#7 0x55a2c4378952 in hostapd_setup_bss ../src/ap/hostapd.c:1333
#8 0x55a2c4382530 in hostapd_setup_interface_complete_sync ../src/ap/hostapd.c:2094
#9 0x55a2c4382815 in hostapd_setup_interface_complete ../src/ap/hostapd.c:2229
#10 0x55a2c4384100 in setup_interface2 ../src/ap/hostapd.c:1726
#11 0x55a2c4386b58 in setup_interface ../src/ap/hostapd.c:1628
#12 0x55a2c4386b58 in hostapd_setup_interface ../src/ap/hostapd.c:2318
#13 0x55a2c4387a57 in hostapd_enable_iface ../src/ap/hostapd.c:2730
#14 0x55a2c455d723 in hostapd_ctrl_iface_enable /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/ctrl_iface.c:1606
#15 0x55a2c455d723 in hostapd_ctrl_iface_receive_process /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/ctrl_iface.c:3607
#16 0x55a2c456821e in hostapd_ctrl_iface_receive /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/ctrl_iface.c:4018
#17 0x55a2c44b9afa in eloop_sock_table_dispatch ../src/utils/eloop.c:603
#18 0x55a2c44be122 in eloop_run ../src/utils/eloop.c:1228
#19 0x55a2c43360bf in hostapd_global_run /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/main.c:451
#20 0x55a2c43360bf in main /home/mbr/hostapd/hostapd/main.c:898
#21 0x7feed8ce20b2 in __libc_start_main (/lib/x86_64-linux-gnu/libc.so.6+0x270b2)
SUMMARY: AddressSanitizer: heap-use-after-free ../src/common/ptksa_cache.c:310 in ptksa_cache_add
Shadow bytes around the buggy address:
0x0c2280004c20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x0c2280004c30: 00 00 fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa
0x0c2280004c40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0x0c2280004c50: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 fa fa fa fa fa fa fa
0x0c2280004c60: fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd
=>0x0c2280004c70: fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd[fd]
0x0c2280004c80: fd fd fd fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa
0x0c2280004c90: fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd
0x0c2280004ca0: fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fa fa fa fa
0x0c2280004cb0: fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fa fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd
0x0c2280004cc0: fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd fd
Shadow byte legend (one shadow byte represents 8 application bytes):
Addressable: 00
Partially addressable: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Heap left redzone: fa
Freed heap region: fd
Stack left redzone: f1
Stack mid redzone: f2
Stack right redzone: f3
Stack after return: f5
Stack use after scope: f8
Global redzone: f9
Global init order: f6
Poisoned by user: f7
Container overflow: fc
Array cookie: ac
Intra object redzone: bb
ASan internal: fe
Left alloca redzone: ca
Right alloca redzone: cb
Shadow gap: cc
==19798==ABORTING
Fixes: a4e3691616 ("WPA: Add PTKSA cache implementation")
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
according to OpenSSL documentation [1], EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_padding()
should be called after EVP_EncryptInit_ex(), EVP_DecryptInit_ex(), or
EVP_CipherInit_ex(). Not doing this causes EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_padding()
to return false on OpenSSL-3.0.0, resulting in the impossibility to
connect in many scenarios. Fix this changing the order of function calls
where needed.
[1] https://www.openssl.org/docs/man1.1.1/man3/EVP_CIPHER_CTX_set_padding.html
Reported-by: Vladimir Benes <vbenes@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Davide Caratti <davide.caratti@gmail.com>
NetworkManager-CI detected systematic failures on test scenarios using
MSCHAPv2 when wpa_supplicant uses OpenSSL-3.0.0.
The 'test_module_tests.py' script also fails, and the following log is
shown:
1627404013.761569: generate_nt_response failed
1627404013.761582: ms_funcs: 1 error
It seems that either DES_set_key() or DES_ecb_encrypt() changed their
semantic, but it doesn't make sense to fix them since their use has been
deprecated. Converting des_encrypt() to avoid use of deprecated
functions proved to fix the problem, and removed a couple of build
warnings at the same time.
Reported-by: Vladimir Benes <vbenes@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Davide Caratti <davide.caratti@gmail.com>
Found using x86_64-cros-linux-gnu-clang (Chromium OS
12.0_pre416183_p20210305-r3 clang version 12.0.0):
radius_client.c:818:24: warning: cast to smaller integer ...
RadiusType msg_type = (RadiusType) sock_ctx;
Signed-off-by: Joshua Emele <jemele@chromium.org>
Add support to receive and process SCS Response frames from the AP and
indicate the status to upper layers.
Signed-off-by: Vinita S. Maloo <vmaloo@codeaurora.org>
Commit 0b8889d8e5 ("P2P: Do not stop Listen state if it is on
correct channel") added a optimization to use Listen state's
remain-on-channel to send out GO Negotiation response frame quickly.
But in Listen state, if GO Negotiation request frame is received before
the remain-on-channel started event from the driver, the above
optimization is not triggered. This showed up in following manner in the
debug log:
p2p0: Starting radio work 'p2p-listen'@0xb4000070ae22d420 after 0.000114 second wait
nl80211: Remain-on-channel cookie 0x100 for freq=2412 MHz duration=204
P2P: Received GO Negotiation Request from 6e:fa:a7:86:e5:e5(freq=2412)
P2P: GO Negotiation with 6e:fa:a7:86:e5:e5
P2P: Stopping find
P2P: Clear timeout (state=WAIT_PEER_CONNECT)
P2P: State WAIT_PEER_CONNECT -> IDLE
nl80211: Cancel remain-on-channel with cookie 0x100
p2p0: Radio work 'p2p-listen'@0xb4000070ae22d420 done in 0.074348 seconds
p2p0: radio_work_free('p2p-listen'@0xb4000070ae22d420): num_active_works --> 0
P2P: State IDLE -> GO_NEG
P2P: Sending GO Negotiation Response
Off-channel: Send action frame: freq=2412 dst=6e:fa:a7:86:e5:e5 src=da:3c:83:7d:70:2b bssid=da:3c:83:7d:70:2b len=196
nl80211: Remain-on-channel event (cancel=0 freq=2412 channel_type=0 duration=400 cookie=0x100 (match))
nl80211: Remain-on-channel event (cancel=1 freq=2412 channel_type=0 duration=0 cookie=0x100 (match))
P2P: GO Negotiation Response (failure) TX callback: success=0
Fix this by adding p2p->pending_listen_freq == freq condition for the
optimization so that the case where the remain-on-channel command has
already been issued to the driver, but the start event has not yet been
received, is covered as well.
Fixes: 0b8889d8e5 ("P2P: Do not stop Listen state if it is on correct channel")
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA new status vendor attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_TWT_STATUS_POWER_SAVE_EXIT_TERMINATE
to indicate the TWT session termination due to power save
exit request from userspace.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the following vendor attribute to indicate the bandwidth to be used
for spectral scan operation:
- QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SPECTRAL_SCAN_CONFIG_BANDWIDTH
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Enhance QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_THERMAL_CMD to fetch thermal
statistics for different temperature levels from the driver to
userspace. The statistics will be stored in the driver/firmware for
predefined temperature levels and will be reported to userspace when
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_THERMAL_CMD is sent with the command type
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_THERMAL_CMD_TYPE_GET_THERMAL_STATS.
The thermal statistics can be cleared from userspace by sending a
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_THERMAL_CMD command with the type
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_THERMAL_CMD_TYPE_CLEAR_THERMAL_STATS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When the driver provides a list of supported modes, hostapd ended up
adding channel 6 even if the 2.4 GHz mode was not included. This
resulted in incorrect behavior of trying to transmit on a not supported
channel in case of 5 GHz only radios.
Fix this by adding the channel 6 by default only if the driver does not
provide a list of supported modes. Whenever the supported modes are
available, only add this channel if it is explicitly listed as an
enabled channel.
This is similar to an earlier wpa_supplicant change in commit
8e5739c3ac ("DPP2: Check channel 6 validity before adding it to chirp
channel list").
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
Determine if the TDLS peer supports TDLS in 6 GHz band based on the HE 6
GHz Band Capabilities element received in the TDLS Setup Response frame.
Indicate the peer's HE 6 GHz capabilities to the driver through
sta_add().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor attributes to configure the driver to enable/disable the
Broadcast TWT support and Rx Control Frame To MultiBSS support in HE
capabilities information field. This attribute is used for testing
purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_TWT_SETUP_WAKE_TIME_TSF
TWT attribute to use it in TWT setup command to pass TSF value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
External applications can store PMKSA entries persistently and
reconfigure them to wpa_supplicant after restart. This can result in
wpa_supplicant having a PMKSA for FILS authentication without having
matching ERP keys for it which would prevent the previously added
mechanism for dropping FILS PMKSA entries to recover from rejected
association attempts.
Fix this by clearing PMKSA entries configured by external applications
upon FILS connection failure even when ERP keys are not available.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
IEEE Std 802.11-2016, 12.4.7.6 specifies:
An SAE Commit message with a status code not equal to SUCCESS shall
indicate that a peer rejects a previously sent SAE Commit message.
An SAE Confirm message, with a status code not equal to SUCCESS, shall
indicate that a peer rejects a previously sent SAE Confirm message.
Thus when SAE authentication failure happens, authentication transaction
sequence number should not be incremented.
Signed-off-by: Jia Ding <jiad@codeaurora.org>
Add new QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to enable/disable
the BSS max idle period support. This attribute is used for testing
purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to use scan
request BSSID value in Probe Request frame RA(A1) for scan.
This attribute is used for testing purpose.
The driver saves this configuration and applies this setting to all user
space scan requests until the setting is cleared. If this configuration
is set, the driver uses the BSSID value from the scan request to set the
RA(A1) in the Probe Request frames during the scan, else the broadcast
address is set in the Probe Request frames RA(A1).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Some of the reconfiguration cases (e.g., with WPS reconfiguration
enabling WPA/WPA2) might end up calling hostapd_setup_wpa() twice
without calling hostapd_deinit_wpa() in the middle. This would have
resulted in a memory leak since the PTKSA cache was being reinitialized
without freeing previous memory allocation.
Fix this by making PTKSA cachine initialization independent of
hapd->wpa_auth so that reinitialization does not happen in a manner that
would have overridden the old hapd->ptksa pointer without freeing the
referenced resources.
Fixes: f2f8e4f458 ("Add PTKSA cache to hostapd")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use WPA3-Personal (SAE+PMF) for P2P connections in the 6 GHz band to
enable the Wi-Fi Display use case on the 6 GHz band without having to
use WPA2-Personal (PSK) on that new band.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Previously, 6 GHz channels were disabled for P2P operations. Use the new
allow_6ghz parameter with P2P_CONNECT, P2P_GROUP_ADD, and P2P_INVITE
commands for P2P connection on the 6 GHz channels when Wi-Fi Display is
enabled on both the devices.
However, the p2p_6ghz_disable parameter in the configuration takes a
higher precedence.
Indicate P2P 6 GHz band capable information in Device Capability Bitmap
of P2P Capability attribute to indicate the P2P Device is capable of P2P
operation in the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Introduce a new allow_6ghz parameter to allow 6 GHz channels to be
filtered out when copying channel lists.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Previously, the 6 GHz channels were disabled for P2P operations.
Introduce a new include_6ghz parameter for the P2P_FIND command to
configure P2P discovery on the 6 GHz channels.
However, the p2p_6ghz_disable parameter in the configuration takes a
higher priority. If the p2p_6ghz_disable parameter is not set in the
configuration, include_6ghz parameter can be used to enable or disable
the discovery operation in the 6 GHz channels for the P2P_FIND command.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
P2P operation on the 6 GHz band is supported in the WFD use case.
Introduce helper functions to check for Wi-Fi Display capability of
the local device and a peer device.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Extend the previously 5 GHz specific 80 and 160 MHz channels helper
functions to support 6 GHz channels.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Introduce P2P 6 GHz band capable information in Device Capability
Bitmap of P2P Capability sub-attribute.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
hostapd_handle_dfs_offload() is the DFS handler for the offloaded case,
in which ieee80211_is_dfs() is used to check if the configured frequency
requires DFS or not.
When the configured channel width is not 20 (e.g., 160),
ieee80211_is_dfs() will not checked adjacent freqs, so it possibly makes
wrong conclusion for whether DFS is required.
hostapd_is_dfs_required() does similar thing with ieee80211_is_dfs()
except it supports checking whether the configured frequency and its
adjacent frequencies require DFS. So hostapd_is_dfs_required() is a more
robust and better option than ieee80211_is_dfs() to check DFS.
The issue is hostapd_is_dfs_required() is for non-offload case due to
the check of the configuration parameter ieee80211h. Add a check for
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_DFS_OFFLOAD to make it support the DFS offload case
(i.e., ieee80211h=0) as well.
For example, configuring the AP to start at freq=5240 with channel width
160:
- Existing hostapd checks freq=5240 is non-DFS, hence skip DFS CAC and
transition to AP-Enabled which volatiles DFS-RADAR detection.
LOG: "hostapd : hostapd_handle_dfs_offload: freq 5240 MHz does not
require DFS. Continue channel/AP setup"
- This commit checks freq=5240 and its adjacent freqs are DFS required,
hence remains in DFS state until DFS CAC completed.
LOG: "hostapd : hostapd_handle_dfs_offload: freq 5240 MHz requires
DFS for 4 chans"
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
When regulatory rules are configured not to support 40 MHz channels on
the 2.4 GHz band, hostapd_is_usable_chans() still allowed 40 MHz
channels (i.e., 1-9) to be used with ht_capab=[HT40+][HT40-].
Looking into hostapd_is_usable_chans():
1) Validate primary channel using hostapd_is_usable_chan()
2) Try to pick a default secondary channel if hostapd_is_usable_chan()
3) Try to pick a valid secondary channel if both HT40+/HT40- set, and
further validate primary channel's allowed bandwidth mask.
4) Return channel not usable.
For example, for the 2.4 GHz channel 9 in Japan, its default secondary
channel is 13, which is valid per hostapd_is_usable_chan(), so step (2)
returns channel usable.
Add a more strict check to step (2) to clearly reject 40 MHz channel
configuration if regulatory rules do not allow the 40 MHz bandwidth,
which is similarly done in commit ce6d9ce15b ("hostapd: Add supported
channel bandwidth checking infrastructure").
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
Add user configuration he_twt_responder for enabling/disabling TWT
responder role, in addition to checking the driver's capability. The
default configuration is to enable TWT responder role when the driver
supports this.
Signed-off-by: Mohammad Asaad Akram <asadkrm@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor interface to configure the driver which transport mode to
use for sending CFR data to userspace. Currently, relayfs and netlink
event modes are supported.
Signed-off-by: Vamsi Krishna <vamsin@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to use Data or
Management frames for keep alive data. This attribute is used for
testing purpose.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to transmit the
Data frames with ER SU PPDU type format. This attribute is used
for testing purpose.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
FILS authentication derives PMK differently from the EAP cases. The PMK
value does not bind in the MAC addresses of the STAs. As such, the same
PMKID is used with different BSSIDs. Fix both the hostapd and
wpa_supplicant to use the previous PMKID as is for OKC instead of
deriving a new PMKID using an incorrect derivation method when using an
FILS AKM.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_FT_OVER_DS
to configure FT over DS to the driver/firmware.
Signed-off-by: Vinita S. Maloo<vmaloo@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA interface to specify the RSSI thresholds separately for candidate
APs from different bands.
Signed-off-by: Vamsi Krishna <vamsin@codeaurora.org>
Mention that for AP mode this attribute is required in
response for TWT SET, TWT GET, TWT SUSPEND, and TWT
TERMINATE. And is required in request for TWT GET, and
TWT TERMINATE.
For STA mode, the usage of this attribute remains unchanged.
Signed-off-by: Mohammad Asaad Akram <asadkrm@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier for test scripts to track completion of 4-way
handshake from hostapd, e.g., when going through PTK rekeying.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it convenient for an external test script to use
ext_eapol_frame_io=1 to delay and/or modify transmission of EAPOL-Key
msg 1/4 without having to use separate frame injection mechanisms.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
"REKEY_PTK <STA MAC address>" can now be used to force rekeying of the
PTK for the specified associated STA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not start yet another rekeying of GTK when receiving an EAPOL-Key
request frame at the point when the GTK is already being rekeyed. This
fixes issues where the AP might end up configuring a different GTK than
the one it sends to the associated stations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This moves the implementation closer to the current IEEE 802.11 standard
since B15 of Frame Control field was renamed to +HTC to match it newer
uses.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA vendor interface for userspace to get information of usable
channels for different interface types from the driver/firmware.
Signed-off-by: Vamsi Krishna <vamsin@codeaurora.org>
Determine bandwidth from op_class parameter when set in config. When not
configured, use he_oper_chwidth for determining 80 MHz or 160 MHz. When
both are not set, fall back to 20 MHz by default. This helps in removing
the dependency on op_class parameter in 6 GHz ACS.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
Add support for the 6 GHz frequencies using 40, 80, and 160 MHz
bandwidths in the AP mode ACS.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
Convert channel based selection to frequency based selection for AP mode
ACS to accommodate for the 6 GHz band needs.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
Previously, the secondary channel was set only in presence of HT
capabilities based on HT40+ or HT40-. As HT capabilities and
secondary_channel are not present for the 6 GHz bamd, this causes
incorrect operating class indication in the Supported Operating Classes
element.
Fix this by assigning the secondary channel for bandwidths greater than
20 MHz in the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
In the 6 GHz Operation Information field, the Channel Center Frequency
Segment 0 field indicates the channel center frequency index for
the 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, or 80+80 MHz channel on which the
BSS operates in the 6 GHz band. If the BSS channel width is 160 MHz
then the Channel Center Frequency Segment 0 field indicates the
channel center frequency index of the primary 80 MHz.
The Channel Center Frequency Segment 1 field indicates the channel
center frequency index of the 160 MHz channel on which the BSS operates
in the 6 GHz band or the channel center frequency of the secondary 80
MHz for the 80+80 MHz channel.
Since Channel Center Frequency Segment 1 was 0 for 160 MHz, 6 GHz STA
associated using 80 MHz. Update seg0 and seg1 fields per standard (IEEE
P802.11ax/D8.0: 9.4.2.249 HE Operation element).
Signed-off-by: P Praneesh <ppranees@codeaurora.org>
When WMM is disabled, HT/VHT/HE capabilities should not be used for any
STA. If any STA advertises these capabilities, hostapd AP disables HT
capabilities in STA flags during STA assoc, but VHT/HE was not handled
similarly. This could allow a STA to associate in VHT/HE mode even in
WMM disable case.
To avoid this, disable VHT/HE capabilities similarly to HT during STA
association, if WMM is not enabled by the STA.
Signed-off-by: Lavanya Suresh <lavaks@codeaurora.org>
Even though these enum definitions are currently identical, it is better
to explicitly map these bits to the kernel interface instead of using
the internal definition for this. This makes it much clearer that new
enum tdls_peer_capability value needs to be assigned in nl80211 before
they can be added into wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Indicate TDLS peer's capability to driver after processing TDLS setup
response frame. This information can be used by the driver to decide
whether to include HE operation IE in TLDS setup confirmation frame.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
The hostapd process crashed when the UPDATE_BEACON control interface
command was issue after the interface was disabled. Check for this case
and return an error if the interface is disabled.
Signed-off-by: Kani M <kanisumi@codeaurora.org>
Get the DPP Relay Controller context from the list of configured
Controllers based on the correct hostapd callback context. This is
needed to pick the correct hostapd interface for sending out the
response over air, e.g., when the same hostapd process controls a 2.4
GHz only and a 5 GHz only interface.
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
The firmware rejects the TWT setup request when scan is in
progress. Extend enum qca_wlan_vendor_twt_status to represent new
reason code for it.
Signed-off-by: Mohammad Asaad Akram <asadkrm@codeaurora.org>
Define a new reason code in enum qca_wlan_vendor_hang_reason,
QCA_WLAN_TASKLET_CREDIT_LATENCY_DETECT, for tasklet/credit latency
detection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduce a QCA vendor command to configure the concurrent connection
policies when multiple STA interfaces are (getting) active.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add timeout to close incomplete DPP relay connections. This is needed to
avoid getting stuck with old entries that prevent new connections from
getting started.
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
When CONFIG_ECC is not defined, openssl/ec.h is not included and EC_KEY
not known. Fix be not defining EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() when CONFIG_ECC is
not defined.
Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Steinwender <wsteinwender@pcs.com>
Simplify the implementation by using shared functions for parsing the
capabilities instead of using various similar but not exactly identical
checks throughout the implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.11-2020 mandates H2E to be used whenever an SAE password
identifier is used. While this was already covered in the
implementation, the sae_prepare_commit() function still included an
argument for specifying the password identifier since that was used in
an old test vector. Now that that test vector has been updated, there is
no more need for this argument anymore. Simplify the older non-H2E case
to not pass through a pointer to the (not really used) password
identifier.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do so for both wpa_supplicant and hostapd. While this was not explicitly
required in IEEE P802.11az/D3.0, likely direction for the draft is to
start requiring use of H2E for all cases where SAE is used with PASN.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When a PTK derivation is done as part of PASN authentication flow, a KDK
derivation should be done if and only if the higher layer protocol is
supported by both parties.
Fix the code accordingly, so KDK would be derived if and only if both
sides support Secure LTF.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Define the new TWT attributes for configuring the broadcast TWT
parameters in enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_twt_setup.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The firmware rejects the TWT setup request when roaming and channel
switch is in progress. Extend enum qca_wlan_vendor_twt_status to
represent new reason codes for these cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This changes the Send-Confirm value for the first SAE Confirm message to
be 1 instead of 0 for all cases to match the design shown in IEEE Std
802.11-2020, Figure 12-4 (SAE finite state machine).
Sc is defined to be "the number of SAE Confirm messages that have been
sent" which is a bit vague on whether the current frame is included in
the count or not. However, the state machine is showing inc(Sc)
operation in all cases before the "2" event to build the Confirm.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the maximum size of MAC ACL entries is large enough, the
configuration message may exceed the default buffer size of a netlink
message which is allocated with nlmsg_alloc(), and result in a failure
when putting the attributes into the message.
To fix this, calculate the required buffer size of the netlink message
according to MAC ACL size and allocate a sufficiently large buffer with
nlmsg_alloc_size().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
NL80211_ATTR_MAC_ACL_MAX is a u32 attribute to advertise the maximum
number of MAC addresses that a device can support for MAC ACL. This was
incorrectly used as a u8 attribute which would not work with any values
larger than 255 or on big endian CPUs. Fix this by moving from
nla_get_u8() to nla_get_u32().
Fixes: 3c4ca36330 ("hostapd: Support MAC address based access control list")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If WMM is not set explicitly in the configuration, it can be set based
on HT/HE config. As HE can be used without HT/VHT (which was introduced
as a special behavior for the 6 GHz band), add a similar automatic
enabling of WMM for HE without HT.
Signed-off-by: Lavanya Suresh <lavaks@codeaurora.org>
Previous debug print used IGTK instead of BIGTK, so fix that to use the
correct key. Actual generation of the BIGTK subelement itself was using
the correct key, though, so this is only needed to fix the debug print.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd configuration parameters ext_capa_mask and ext_capa can
now be used to mask out or add extended capability bits. While this is
not without CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS, the main use case for this is for
testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to determine the exact length of the element before
filling in the octets since this function is already capable of
truncated the fields based on what the actual values are.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reuse the SAE anti-clogging token implementation to support similar
design with the PASN comeback cookie.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The GAS client processing of the response callback for DPP did not
properly check for GAS query success. This could result in trying to
check the Advertisement Protocol information in failure cases where that
information is not available and that would have resulted in
dereferencing a NULL pointer. Fix this by checking the GAS query result
before processing with processing of the response.
This is similar to the earlier wpa_supplicant fix in commit 931f7ff656
("DPP: Fix GAS client error case handling").
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
eap_sim_anonymous_username() gets called with an argument that is not a
null terminated C string and as such, os_strrchr() and os_strlen()
cannot be used with it. The previous implementation resulted in use of
uninitialized values and a potential read beyond the end of the buffer.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=32277
Fixes: 73d9891bd7 ("EAP-SIM/AKA peer: Support decorated anonymous identity prefix")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible to receive the Configuration Request frame before having
seen TX status for the Authentication Confirm. In that sequence, the
DPP-AUTH-SUCCESS event would not be indicated before processing the
configuration step and that could confuse upper layers that follow the
details of the DPP exchange. As a workaround, indicate DPP-AUTH-SUCCESS
when receiving the Configuration Request since the Enrollee/Responser
has clearly receive the Authentication Confirm even if the TX status for
it has not been received.
This was already done in wpa_supplicant in commit 422e73d623 ("DPP:
Indicate authentication success on ConfReqRX if needed") and matching
changes are now added to hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Need to get EAP state machine into a state where it is willing to
proceed with a new EAP-Request/Identity if PMKSA cache addition fails
after a successful EAP authentication before the initial 4-way handshake
can be completed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The waiting_conn_status_result flag was not set which made hostapd
discard the Connection Status Result. Fix this to match the
wpa_supplicant implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new testing parameter to allow airtime policy implementation to be
tested for more coverage even without kernel driver support.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is better to be able to determine whether the airtime weight
configuration for a STA actually was accepted by the driver or not.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The firmware sends new reason codes to indicate TWT teardown due to
single channel and multi channel concurrency. Update the enum
qca_wlan_vendor_twt_status to represent new reason code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
To allow for a PASN station to deauthenticate from an AP to clear any
PTKSA cache entry for it, extend the nl80211 interface to allow sending
a Deauthentication frame with off channel enabled.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When a Deauthentication frame is received, clear the corresponding PTKSA
cache entry for the given station, to invalidate previous PTK
information.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The anti-clogging code was under CONFIG_SAE. Change this so it can be
used both with CONFIG_SAE and CONFIG_PASN.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
PASN authentication mandates support for comeback flow, which
among others can be used for anti-clogging purposes.
As the SAE support for anti clogging can also be used for PASN,
start modifying the source code so the anti clogging support
can be used for both SAE and PASN.
As a start, rename some variables/functions etc. so that they would not
be SAE specific. The configuration variable is also renamed, but the old
version remains available for backwards compatibility.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
For testing purposes, add support for corrupting the MIC in PASN
Authentication frames for both wpa_supplicant and hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When a public key is included in the PASN Parameters element, it should
be encoded using the RFC 5480 conventions, and thus the first octet of
the Ephemeral Public Key field should indicate whether the public key is
compressed and the actual key part starts from the second octet.
Fix the implementation to properly adhere to the convention
requirements for both wpa_supplicant and hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
As defined in IEEE P802.11az/D3.0, 12.12.3.2 for the second PASN frame.
This was previously covered only for the case when the explicit PMKSA
was provided to the helper function. Extend that to cover the PMKID from
SAE/FILS authentication cases.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When ERP initialization was moved from the METHOD state to the SUCCESS
state, the conditions for checking against EAP state being cleared was
missed. The METHOD state verified that sm->m is not NULL while the
SUCCESS state did not have such a check. This opened a window for a race
condition where processing of deauthentication event and EAPOL RX events
could end up delivering an EAP-Success to the EAP peer state machine
after the state had been cleared. This issue has now been worked around
in another manner, but the root cause for this regression should be
fixed as well.
Check that the EAP state machine is properly configured before trying to
initialize ERP in the SUCCESS state.
Fixes: 2a71673e27 ("ERP: Derive ERP key only after successful EAP authentication")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The highest supported TLS version for pre_master_secret needs to be
limited based on the local configuration for the case where the highest
version number is being explicitly disabled. Without this, the server
would likely detect a downgrade attack.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The supported hash algorithms do not use AlgorithmIdentifier parameters.
However, there are implementations that include NULL parameters in
addition to ones that omit the parameters. Previous implementation did
not check the parameters value at all which supported both these cases,
but did not reject any other unexpected information.
Use strict validation of digest algorithm parameters and reject any
unexpected value when validating a signature. This is needed to prevent
potential forging attacks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Digest is within the DigestInfo SEQUENCE and as such, parsing for it
should use the end of that data instead of the end of the decrypted
signature as the end point. Fix this in the PKCS #1 and X.509
implementations to avoid accepting invalid digest data that is
constructed to get the hash value from after the actual DigestInfo
container.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The definite long form for the length is allowed only for cases where
the definite short form cannot be used, i.e., if the length is 128 or
greater. This was not previously enforced and as such, multiple
different encoding options for the same length could have been accepted.
Perform more strict checks to reject invalid cases for the definite long
form for the length. This is needed for a compliant implementation and
this is especially important for the case of verifying DER encoded
signatures to prevent potential forging attacks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The extended tag case is allowed only for tag values that are 31 or
larger (i.e., the ones that would not fit in the single octet identifier
case with five bits). Extended tag format was previously accepted even
for the values 0..31 and this would enable multiple different encodings
for the same tag value. That is not allowed for DER.
Perform more strict checks to reject invalid extended tag values. This
is needed for a compliant implementation and this is especially
important for the case of verifying DER encoded signatures to prevent
potential forging attacks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The identifier octet in DER encoding includes three components. Only two
of these (Class and Tag) were checked in most cases when looking for a
specific data type. Also check the Primitive/Constructed bit to avoid
accepting invalid encoding.
This is needed for correct behavior in DER parsing and especially
important for the case of verifying DER encoded signatures to prevent
potential forging attacks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Send a flag to the kernel when user has specified disable_he=1 in the
network configuration block. This extends the functionality added in
commit 7c8f540ee0 ("wpa_supplicant: Add HE override support") to cover
the cases that need kernel functionality.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
If listen work never started, pending_listen_freq might be left
uncleared, preventing the subsequent listen to start. This could happen
in p2p_timeout_wait_peer_idle() after the commit 13256b8cf ("P2P: Stop
old listen radio work before go to WAIT_PEER_IDLE state") added a
stop_listen() call there.
Fixes: 13256b8cf3 ("P2P: Stop old listen radio work before go to WAIT_PEER_IDLE state")
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The 6 GHz band operating class 136 is defined to use 20 MHz bandwidth.
Return the value accordingly from center_idx_to_bw_6ghz() to cover this
special case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define the following additional TWT attribute for
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_twt_setup:
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_TWT_SETUP_WAKE_INTVL2_MANTISSA to configure the
mantissa in microseconds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds new control interface commands TWT_SETUP and TWT_TEARDOWN. For
now, these are only for testing purposes to be able to trigger
transmission of the TWT Action frames without configuring any local
behavior for TWT in the driver.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
This function can get called with hapd->wpa_auth == NULL from the
control interface handler, so explicitly check for that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is needed to be able to move from 80 MHz or lower bandwidth to 160
or 80+80 MHz bandwidth (and back) properly without leaving the Beacon
frame VHT elements showing incorrect information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In addition, make the compiler warn if a new enum value is added without
defining the matching mapping to a string.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is more convenient to see the exact error in the debug log instead of
getting noted that something was invalid.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The nl_connect is initialized with the process_bss_event() handler.
However, it is used several times with the default valid handler. As a
result, if a message that is only valid for process_bss_event() is
received while the default handler is used, it will be dropped.
This has been observed in a case where during the 4-way handshake, a
Beacon frame is received on the AP side, which triggers a beacon update,
just before receiving the next EAPOL. When send_and_recv_msgs_owner() is
called for sending the NL80211_CMD_SET_BEACON command, the
NL80211_CMD_CONTROL_PORT_FRAME event is already pending. As a result, it
is received with the default handler, which drops it. Since the EAPOL
frame is dropped, the connection attempt fails.
Fix it by using the process_bss_event() handler when the nl_connect
handler is used.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
While it does not look like the stale pointer could have been
dereferenced in practice, it is better not to leave the stale pointer to
freed memory in place to avoid accidental uses.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hapd->tmp_eap_user needs to be cleared on interface deinit to avoid
leaving stale pointers to freed memory.
Fixes: ee431d77a5 ("Add preliminary support for using SQLite for eap_user database")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When an interface is disabled, e.g. due to radar detected,
hapd->time_adv is freed by hostapd_free_hapd_data(), but later
used by ieee802_11_build_ap_params() calling hostapd_eid_time_adv().
Thus hapd->time_adv needs to be cleared as well.
Fixes: 39b97072b2 ("Add support for Time Advertisement")
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to allow the 6 GHz
connection with all security types. This attribute is used for testing
purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to ignore SAE H2E requirement mismatch for 6
GHz connection. This attribute is used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
sm->bssid is still the BSSID of the previous AP at this point in the FT
protocol, so need to show the target AP's BSSID instead in the failure
message.
Fixes: 8c1f61e820 ("OCV: Report OCI validation failures with OCV-FAILURE messages (STA)")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is an attempt of making the code easier to understand for static
analyzers. The helper functions were already verifying that these IEs
are fully within the memory buffer, but that may not have been clear
enough for automated analysis.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit f1df4fbfc7 ("mesh: Use setup completion callback to complete
mesh join") added a check for iface->conf being NULL into a debug print.
However, it is not clear how that could be NULL here. In any case,
setup_interface() could end up dereferencing iface->conf in the call to
hostapd_validate_bssid_configuration(), so better be consistent with the
checks and not get warnings from static analyzers regardless of whether
this can happen in practice.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no point in trying to build in rest of this function if in the
middle of it the CONFIG_NO_RADIUS case would unconditionally fail.
Simply make all of this be conditional on that build parameter not being
set to make things easier for static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The value from the initial RSN_CIPHER_SUITE_NO_GROUP_ADDRESSED check
ended up getting overridden with the following if. This was supposed to
be a single if statement to avoid that.
Fixes: 9c02a0f5a6 ("FILS: Add generation of FILS Discovery frame template")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Build eap_*.so into the wpa_supplicant similarly with the wpa_supplicant
binary and include the shared helper functions from additional files
into the builds. This got broken at some point with the build system
changes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These frames are used for verifying that a specific SA and protected
link is in functional state between two devices. The IEEE 802.11
standard defines only a case that uses individual MAC address as the
destination. While there is no explicit rule on the receiver to ignore
other cases, it seems safer to make sure group-addressed frames do not
end up resulting in undesired behavior. As such, drop such frames
instead of interpreting them as valid SA Query Request/Response.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use a helper function as the do_acs() callback to allow builds to pull
in all the vendor specific operations into a single binary.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
BRCM vendor command used to trigger ACS scan. After ACS finished,
DHD driver will send results by event BRCM_VENDOR_EVENT_ACS.
Signed-off-by: Xinrui Sun <xinrui.sun@broadcom.com>
Allow the RADIUS client socket to be bound to a specific netdev. This
helps hostapd work better in VRF and other fancy network environments.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Signed-off-by: Andreas Tobler <andreas.tobler at onway.ch>
Add DRIVER command support on hostapd and hostapd_cli on Android
similarly to the way this previously enabled in wpa_supplicant and
wpa_cli.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Determine if the TDLS peer is HE capable based on HE Capability element
received in the TDLS Setup Response frame. Indicate the peer's HE
capabilities to the driver through sta_add().
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
p2p_add_device() may remove the oldest entry if there is no room in the
peer table for a new peer. This would result in any pointer to that
removed entry becoming stale. A corner case with an invalid PD Request
frame could result in such a case ending up using (read+write) freed
memory. This could only by triggered when the peer table has reached its
maximum size and the PD Request frame is received from the P2P Device
Address of the oldest remaining entry and the frame has incorrect P2P
Device Address in the payload.
Fix this by fetching the dev pointer again after having called
p2p_add_device() so that the stale pointer cannot be used.
Fixes: 17bef1e97a ("P2P: Add peer entry based on Provision Discovery Request")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to enable/disable the Punctured Preamble Rx
support in HE PHY capabilities.
This attribute is used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver to disable data and
management response frame transmission to test the BSS max idle period
feature.
This attribute is used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver/firmware to use only
RU 242 tone for data frame transmission.
This attribute is used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver with a specific BSS
max idle period value to advertise in (Re)Association Request frames.
This attribute is used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Reordering of code in handle_auth_cb() when adding support for full
station state messaged up frame length checks. The length was originally
tested before looking at the payload of the frame and that is obviously
the correct location for that check. The location after those full state
state changes was after having read six octets of the payload which did
not help at all since there was no addition accesses to the payload
after that check.
Move the payload length check to appropriate place to get this extra
level of protection behaving in the expected manner. Since this is a TX
status callback handler, the frame payload is from a locally generated
Authentication frame and as such, it will be long enough to include
these fields in production use cases. Anyway, better keep this check in
working condition.
Fixes: bb598c3bdd ("AP: Add support for full station state")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The TX event for the next frame in the sequence might be received before
the TX status for the final GAS response frame is processed. This used
to result in the Config Result getting discarded and the negotiation not
completing successfully on the Configurator side.
Accept the Config Result message as an indication of the final GAS
response frame having went through fine even if the TX status has not
yet been processed to avoid this issue from a potential race condition
on kernel events.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace the Radiotap parser platform.h file with use of helper functions
from utils/common.h to avoid compiler issues with the updated design and
getting pointers to members of packet structs.
Silence the warning about _next_bitmap assignment. This pointer is
dereferenced only with operations that are safe for unaligned access, so
the compiler warning is not helpful here.
__packed might not be defined in this context, so use STRUCT_PACKED from
utils/common.h.
Fixes: e6ac269433 ("radiotap: Update radiotap parser")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use the explicit Commitment Message per draft-ietf-emu-eap-tls13-13
Section 2.5 and extend this functionality to PEAP and EAP-TTLS when
using TLS 1.3.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
Recognize the explicitly defined Commitment Message per
draft-ietf-emu-eap-tls13-13 at the conclusion of the EAP-TTLS with TLS
1.3.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
Recognize the explicitly defined Commitment Message per
draft-ietf-emu-eap-tls13-13 at the conclusion of the EAP-TLS with TLS
1.3.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
This newer Session-Id/Method-Id derivation is used with PEAP and
EAP-TTLS when using TLS 1.3 per draft-ietf-emu-tls-eap-types-00, so do
not limit this to only EAP-TLS.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
Use the TLS-Exporter with the label and context as defined in
draft-ietf-emu-tls-eap-types-00 when deriving keys for EAP-TTLS with TLS
1.3.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
Use the TLS-Exporter with the label and context as defined in
draft-ietf-emu-tls-eap-types-00 when deriving keys for PEAP with TLS
1.3.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
EAP peer does not expect data present when beginning the Phase 2 in
EAP-{TTLS,PEAP} but in TLS 1.3 session tickets are sent after the
handshake completes.
There are several strategies that can be used to handle this, but this
patch picks up from the discussion[1] and implements the proposed use of
SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY. SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY has already been enabled by
default in OpenSSL 1.1.1, but it needs to be enabled for older versions.
The main OpenSSL wrapper change in tls_connection_decrypt() takes care
of the new possible case with SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY for
SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ to indicate that a non-application_data was
processed. That is not really an error case with TLS 1.3, so allow it to
complete and return an empty decrypted application data buffer.
EAP-PEAP/TTLS processing can then use this to move ahead with starting
Phase 2.
[1] https://www.spinics.net/lists/hostap/msg05376.html
Signed-off-by: Alexander Clouter <alex@digriz.org.uk>
Previously nl80211_nlmsg_clear() would be called under a special
condition when valid_handler is NULL and valid_data is -1. Such API is
not very convenient as it forces the handler to be NULL. Change the
send_and_recv() function to always clear the nl_msg, which will simplify
all this logic.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The capability bit index should not be shifted here as the shifting is
handled later below when building the RSNXE octets.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The RADIUS client currently determines if a radius message is longer
than the supported maximum length by checking whether the size of the
received buffer and the length of the buffer (as returned by recv()) is
equal. This method fails to detect if the buffer has actually been
truncated. This change modifies the RADIUS client to instead use the
recvmsg() call and then check the message header flags to determine
whether or not the received message has been truncated and drop the
message if that is the case.
Signed-off-by: Anusha Datar <anusha@meter.com>
Reviewed-by: Steve deRosier <derosier@cal-sierra.com>
Reviewed-by: Julian Squires <julian@cipht.net>
The current RADIUS server message maximum length limits the length of
each RADIUS message to 3000 bytes. As specified in RFC 2865 section 3
("Packet Format"), the RADIUS standard's maximum message size is 4096
bytes, so this change increases the RADIUS server's maximum message
size from 3000 to 4096 to match the standard.
Signed-off-by: Anusha Datar <anusha@meter.com>
Reviewed-by: Steve deRosier <derosier@cal-sierra.com>
Reviewed-by: Julian Squires <julian@cipht.net>
The RADIUS client currently uses a hardcoded value of 3000 for the
maximum length of a RADIUS message, and the RADIUS server currently
defines a constant value for the maximum length of the RADIUS message
within its source. The client and the server should use the same
maximum length value, so this change creates a shared parameter
RADIUS_MAX_MSG_LEN within the header file radius.h and modifies
both the client and the server to use that parameter instead of
a locally set value.
Signed-off-by: Anusha Datar <anusha@meter.com>
Reviewed-by: Steve deRosier <derosier@cal-sierra.com>
Reviewed-by: Julian Squires <julian@cipht.net>
Add additional attributes for the QCA vendor command
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_STA_INFO to get finer details on roaming
behavior, TSF out of sync count, and the latest TX rate, Rate Index used
for the transmission.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When the driver SME is used, offloaded handshakes which need Operating
Channel Validation (OCV) such as SA Query procedure, etc. would fail if
hostapd enables OCV based on configuration but the driver doesn't
support OCV. To avoid this when driver SME is used, enable OCV from
hostapd only when the driver indicates support for OCV.
This commit also adds a capability flag to indicate whether driver SME
is used in AP mode.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
When the driver SME is used, offloaded RSN handshakes like SA Query, GTK
rekeying, FT authentication, etc. would fail if wpa_supplicant enables
OCV in initial connection based on configuration but the driver doesn't
support OCV. To avoid such failures check the driver's capability for
enabling OCV when the driver SME used.
This commit also adds a capability flag for indicating OCV support
by the driver.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Enabling beacon protection will cause STA connection/AP setup failures
if the driver doesn't support beacon protection. To avoid this, check
the driver capability before enabling beacon protection.
This commit also adds a capability flag to indicate beacon protection
support in client mode only.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
It was not easily possible to separate configuration of an interface and
credentials when using the configuration file instead of the control
interface or D-Bus interface for setting up the network profiles. This
makes it hard to distribute configuration across a set of nodes which
use wpa_supplicant without also having to store credentials in the same
file. While this can be solved via scripting, having a native way to
achieve this would be preferable.
Turns out there already is a framework to have external password
storages. It only had a single "test" backend though, which is kind of
an in-memory store which gets initialized with all passwords up front
and is mainly for testing purposes. This isn't really suitable for the
above use case: the backend cannot be initialized as part of the central
configuration given that it needs the credentials, and we want to avoid
scripting.
This commit thus extends the infrastructure to implement a new backend,
which instead uses a simple configuration file containing key-value
pairs. The file follows the format which wpa_supplicant.conf(5) uses:
empty lines and comments are ignored, while passwords can be specified
with simple `password-name=password-value` assignments.
With this new backend, splitting up credentials and configuration
becomes trivial:
# /etc/wpa_supplicant/wpa_supplicant.conf
ext_password_backend=file:/etc/wpa_supplicant/psk.conf
network={
ssid="foobar"
psk=ext:foobar
}
# /etc/wpa_supplicant/psk.conf
foobar=ecdabff9c80632ec6fcffc4a8875e95d45cf93376d3b99da6881298853dc686b
Alternative approaches would be to support including other configuration
files in the main configuration, such that common configuration and
network declarations including credentials are split up into separate
files. But the implementation would probably have been more complex
compared to reusing the already-existing framework for external password
backends.
Signed-off-by: Patrick Steinhardt <ps@pks.im>
The function wpa_config_get_line() is used by the wpa_supplicant config
file parser to retrieve the next non-comment non-blank line. We'll need
the same kind of functionality to implement the file-based external
password backend, so as a preparatory step this commit extracts the
function into its own standalone file in the utils package.
No functional changes are expected from this commit.
Signed-off-by: Patrick Steinhardt <ps@pks.im>
At least the ACS case of an attempt to pick a 40 MHz channel on the 2.4
GHz band could fail if HE was enabled and the driver did not include
support for 40 MHz channel bandwidth on the 2.4 GHz band in HE
capabilities. This resulted in "40 MHz channel width is not supported in
2.4 GHz" message when trying to configure the channel and failure to
start the AP.
Avoid this by automatically falling back to using 20 MHz bandwidth as
part of channel parameter determination at the end of the ACS procedure.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When auto channel selection (ACS) is used for HE 40 MHz in the 2.4 GHz
band, AP sets center frequency after finding a 40 MHz channel and then
runs a scan for overlapping BSSes in neighboring channels. Upon OBSS
detection, AP should downgrade to 20 MHz bandwidth.
This was broken because allowed_ht40_channel_pair() returns true in this
case and the steps to reset center frequency are not executed causing
failure to bring interface up.
Fix the condition to allow rollback to 20 MHz.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Unsolicited broadcast Probe Response transmission is used for in-band
discovery in the 6 GHz band (IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0 26.17.2.3.2, AP
behavior for fast passive scanning). Add support for configuring the
parameters for such frames.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Add hostapd configuration options for unsolicited broadcast
Probe Response transmission for in-band discovery in 6 GHz.
Maximum allowed packet interval is 20 TUs (IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0
26.17.2.3.2, AP behavior for fast passive scanning).
Setting value to 0 disables the transmission.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
This makes the error message easier to understand if the AP mode setup
failure is caused by invalid secondary channel configuration while the
primary channel is valid.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add hostapd configuration parameters for FILS Discovery frame
transmission interval and prepare a template for FILS Discovery frame
for the driver interface. The actual driver interface changes are not
included in this commit.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
This information is needed in more than one place, so add a helper
function to avoid need to duplicate this code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add definitions from IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, 9.6.8.36 FILS discovery
frame format and extensions for the 6 GHz band from IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
A similar change was previously done for Probe Response frames, but the
Beacon frame case was missed. Fix this to remove the VHT elements also
from Beacon frames on the 6 GHz since the relevant information is
included only in the HE elements on that band.
Fixes: 49e95ee1ee ("AP: Publish only HE capabilities and operation IEs on 6 GHz band")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
According to IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0, add Transmit Power Envelope element
into Beacon and Probe Response frames when operating HE AP on the 6 GHz
band.
Signed-off-by: Shay Bar <shay.bar@celeno.com>
hostapd_get_oper_chwidth(iconf) instead of direct access to
iface->conf->vht_oper_chwidth is needed here to be able to use this with
HE in cases where VHT is not enabled.
Signed-off-by: Shay Bar <shay.bar@celeno.com>
According to latest IEEE 802.11 standard, Transmit Power Envelope
element is also relevant to IEEE 802.11ax and is no longer called VHT
Transmit Power Envelope. Remove the VHT naming from the element and move
hostapd_eid_txpower_envelope() from ieee802_11_vht.c to ieee802_11.c in
preparation of using it with HE.
Signed-off-by: Shay Bar <shay.bar@celeno.com>
nl80211_set_4addr_mode() could fail when trying to enable 4addr mode on
an interface that is in a bridge and has 4addr mode already enabled.
This operation would not have been necessary in the first place and this
failure results in disconnecting, e.g., when roaming from one backhaul
BSS to another BSS with Multi AP.
Avoid this issue by ignoring the nl80211 command failure in the case
where 4addr mode is being enabled while it has already been enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The HE 6 GHz capability was not being sent to the kernel causing 6 GHz
support being unidentifiable in the kernel driver for added stations.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
The Authentication Request frames triggered by the reception of a
Presence Announcement frame were sent to the broadcast address. This is
not correct behavior since the source MAC address of the Presence
Announcement frame was supposed to override the Responder MAC address.
Fix this by using that source MAC address to avoid unnecessary use of
broadcast frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new status code values for SAE H2E and PK resulted in the
sta->added_unassoc cases incorrectly removing the STA entry after
successful SAE commit messages. Fix this by using sae_status_success()
instead of direct check for WLAN_STATUS_SUCCESS when processing SAE
commit messages before removing station entry.
Signed-off-by: Aloka Dixit <alokad@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
There are 2 HW modes with IEEE80211_MODE_A: one for the 5 GHz channels
and one for 6 GHz channels. Since hw_get_chan() checks all the
compatible hw modes, eventually, an incorrect hw mode is selected.
To fix this, add a function that checks if a specific mode supports
the requested frequency and if so use it as the current mode.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Extend SPR element to support following fields and pass all
information to kernel for driver use.
* Non-SRG OBSS PD Max Offset
* SRG BSS Color Bitmap
* SRG Partial BSSID Bitmap
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Allow HE MCS rate to be used for beacon transmission when the driver
advertises the support. The rate is specified with a new beacon_rate
option "he:<HE MCS>" in hostapd configuration.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Use the correct enum nl80211_band value when configuring the beacon rate
for the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Enable user to configure Maximum MPDU Length, Maximum A-MPDU Length
Exponent, Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency, and Tx Antenna Pattern
Consistency of 6 GHz capability through config file.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
This could fail in theory if running out of memory, so better check for
this explicitly instead of allowing the exchange to continue and fail
later due to checkcode mismatch.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use more accurate INTERWORKING_EXCLUDED for this. The actual event
prefix is not changed to remains compatible with external components
using this control interface event message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
For EU, where preCAC is allowed, we should allow switch to DFS available
channels, instead of restarting BSS.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@gmail.com>
When new credentials are configured and hostapd is reconfigured using
SIGHUP (or RELOAD on the ctrl_iface), also update the WPS credentials.
Before these changes, when WPS is triggered the Registar always serves
the credentials that were configured when hostapd started.
Signed-off-by: Raphaël Mélotte <raphael.melotte@mind.be>
This is in preparation of larger changes in hostapd_update_wps() to keep
the commits more readable.
Signed-off-by: Raphaël Mélotte <raphael.melotte@mind.be>
Some time ago it was found some drivers are setting their hw/ucode RX
filters restrictively enough to prevent broadcast DPP Action frames from
being received at upper layers in the stack.
A set of patches was introduced to the kernel and
ath9k driver as well as wpa_supplicant, e.g.,
a39e9af90 ("nl80211: DPP listen mode callback")
4d2ec436e ("DPP: Add driver operation for enabling/disabling listen mode")
However, the hostapd code itself was not calling the new multicast
registration. As such the AP side of things wasn't working as expected
in some scenarios. I've found this while trying to get ath9k working as
an AP Responder/Configurator.
The problem wasn't seen on, e.g., mac80211 hwsim driver.
Extend the wpa_supplicant mechanism to work with hostapd as well.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal@plume.com>
In some contexts (e.g., Multi-AP) it can be useful to have access to
some of the management frames in upper layers (e.g., to be able to
process the content of association requests externally).
Add 'notify_mgmt_frames'. When enabled, it will notify the ctrl_iface
when a management frame arrives using the AP-MGMT-FRAME-RECEIVED event
message.
Note that to avoid completely flooding the ctrl_iface, not all
management frames are included (e.g., Beacon and Probe Request frames
are excluded).
Signed-off-by: Raphaël Mélotte <raphael.melotte@mind.be>
Add option 2 to the p2p_device_random_mac_addr configuration option to
support device drivers which use by default random MAC adresses when
creating a new P2P Device interface (for instance, the BCM2711 80211
wireless device driver included in Raspberry Pi 4 Model B). In such
case, this option allows to create the P2P Device interface correctly
when using P2P permanent groups, enabling wpa_supplicant to reuse the
same MAC address when re-invoking a P2P permanent group.
update_config=1 is required.
Signed-off-by: Ircama <amacri@tiscali.it>
Messages such as RTM_IFNFO or RTM_IFANNOUNCE could have been lost.
As such, sync the state of our internal driver to the state of the
system interfaces as reports by getifaddrs(2).
This change requires the routing socket be placed in non-blocking
mode. While here, set the routing and inet sockets to close on exec.
BSDs that support SO_RERROR include NetBSD and DragonFly.
There is a review underway to add this to FreeBSD.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
When the AP advertised RSNE, RSNXE, and WPA IE, hostapd incorrectly
removed the RSNE in the EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 if the STA associates with
WPA, leaving only RSNXE instead of WPA IE. WPA STA fails to connect to
such AP as the WPA IE is missing.
Since RSNXE is not really used in non-RSN connection, just remove it
here with RSNE.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This is needed to avoid the corner case of local RSNXE aware station
being configured to behave as WPA(v1)-only STA when the AP might not
include RSNXE in EAPOL-Key msg 3/4.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Old gcc versions complain about signed/unsigned comparison in
dpp_rx_gas_resp(). Hide it.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
There's no point in attempting to configure frame filters on
a P2P-Devices that doesn't even have a netdev (nor passes any
data traffic), that just results in error messages. Skip it.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add HE as an accepted option ("he") in the CHAN_SWITCH command similarly
to the way VHT is addressed.
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
This is mainly to help with fuzz testing that could generate overly long
test data that would not be possible in real use cases due to MMPDU size
limits. The implementation for storing vendor IEs with such
unrealisticly long IE buffers can result in huge number of memory
reallozations and analyzing those can be very heavy.
While the maximum length of the fuzzing test input could be limited, it
seems nicer to limit this IE storage limit instead to avoid timeouts
from fuzz test runs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Parsing and copying of WPS secondary device types list was verifying
that the contents is not too long for the internal maximum in the case
of WPS messages, but similar validation was missing from the case of P2P
group information which encodes this information in a different
attribute. This could result in writing beyond the memory area assigned
for these entries and corrupting memory within an instance of struct
p2p_device. This could result in invalid operations and unexpected
behavior when trying to free pointers from that corrupted memory.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=27269
Fixes: e57ae6e19e ("P2P: Keep track of secondary device types for peers")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Derive the KDK as part of PMK to PTK derivation if forced by
configuration or in case both the local AP and the peer station declare
support for secure LTF.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Derive the KDK as part of PMK to PTK derivation if forced by
configuration or in case both the local station and the AP declare
support for secure LTF.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
IEEE P802.11az/D2.6 added definitions to include RSNXE in the PASN
negotiation. Implement the new functionality in both wpa_supplicant and
hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
IEEE P802.11az/D2.6 defines the following additional capabilities to
RSNXE:
- Secure LTF support
- Secure RTT support
- Protection of range negotiation and measurement management frames.
Add support for advertising the new capabilities.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Note that the implementation is not complete as it is missing support
for the FT wrapped data which is optional for the station, but must be
supported by the AP in case the station included it.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add support for PASN authentication with FT key derivation:
- As IEEE P802.11az/D2.6 states that wrapped data is optional and
is only needed for further validation of the FT security parameters,
do not include them in the first PASN frame.
- PASN with FT key derivation requires knowledge of the PMK-R1 and
PMK-R1-Name for the target AP. As the WPA state machine stores PMK-R1,
etc. only for the currently associated AP, store the mapping of
BSSID to R1KH-ID for each previous association, so the R1KH-ID
could be used to derive PMK-R1 and PMK-R1-Name. Do so instead
of storing the PMK-R1 to avoid maintaining keys that might not
be used.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
As the PASN FILS authentication is only defined for FILS SK without PFS,
and to support PASN authentication with FILS, implement the PASN with
FILS processing as part of the PASN handling and not as part of the WPA
Authenticator state machine.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add PASN implementation to wpa_supplicant
1. Add functions to initialize and clear PASN data.
2. Add functions to construct PASN Authentication frames.
3. Add function to process PASN Authentication frame.
4. Add function to handle PASN frame TX status.
5. Implement the station side flow processing for PASN.
The implementation is missing support for wrapped data and PMKSA
establishment for base AKMs, and only supports PASN authentication or
base AKM with PMKSA caching.
The missing parts will be added in later patches.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
PASN requires to store the PTK derived during PASN authentication
so it can later be used for secure LTF etc. This is also true
for a PTK derived during regular connection.
Add an instance of a PTKSA cache for each wpa_supplicant
interface when PASN is enabled in build configuration.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In order to be able to perform secure LTF measurements, both the
initiator and the responder need to first derive TK and KDK and store
them, so they would later be available for the secure LTF negotiation.
Add a basic implementation of a PTKSA cache that stores derived TK/KDK
which can later be used for secure LTF negotiation, and add it to the
build configuration.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add helper functions to construct a PASN Authentication frame and
validate its content, which are common to both wpa_supplicant and
hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
1. Add a function to derive the PTK from a PMK and additional data.
2. Add a function to calculate the MIC for a PASN frames.
3. Add a function to compute the hash of an authentication frame body.
The above are built only in case that CONFIG_PASN is enabled at build
time.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Extend the fils_pmk_to_ptk() to also derive Key Derivation
Key (KDK) which can later be used for secure LTF measurements.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Extend the wpa_pmk_r1_to_ptk() to also derive Key Derivation
Key (KDK), which can later be used for secure LTF measurements.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Extend the wpa_pmk_to_ptk() to also derive Key Derivation
Key (KDK), which can later be used for secure LTF measurements.
Update the wpa_supplicant and hostapd configuration and the
corresponding WPA and WPA Auth state machine, to allow enabling of KDK
derivation. For now, use a testing parameter to control whether KDK is
derived.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
PASN authentication requires that group management cipher suite
would be set to 00-0F-AC:7 in the RSNE, so consider it as a valid
group management cipher and adjust the code accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add support for new channels 173 and 177 in the operating classes 125 to
130 as defined in draft IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
The operating class 129 includes channels with a maximum bandwidth of
160 MHz with center frequency index 50 and 114. The previous definition
of operating class 129 considered the center frequency index as actual
channels resulting in incorrect channel setup for the operating class.
Fix the definition of operating class 129 to consider channels with the
center frequency index of 50 and 114.
Also update the comment that describes the channel selection for
operating 128, 129, and 130 which mentions wpas_p2p_allow_channel()
verifies the channels while wpas_p2p_verify_channel() takes care of it.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
After sending DPP Auth Response, the Responder might not receive the
Auth Confirm either due to the Initiator not sending it or the reception
of the frame failing for some reason (e.g., Responder having already
left the negotiation channel). If this happens, following initiation
attempts would fail since the consecutive Auth Request would get
discarded since the previous authentication is still in progress.
Terminate DPP authentication on Responder, if no Auth Confirm is
received within one second of successfully sending Auth Response. This
allows the Responder to accept start of a new exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When wpa_supplicant sends NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE to kernel, it is
possible that the cfg80211 in kernel has expired the BSS entry that
we are trying to auth with. Then cfg80211 will reject the auth cmd.
In this case, wpa_supplicant will trigger a single channel scan to
refresh cfg80211 BSS entry, and retry the auth when scan is finished.
When this case happens, wpa_supplicant makes a copy of auth params,
such as frequency, bssid, ssid, ie and so on. So when we retry auth,
the copy of these params will be used. The problem is, a param named
auth_data is missed when making the copy. The auth_data is used by
NL80211_ATTR_SAE_DATA which is a mandatory field for WPA3-SAE auth.
In WPA3-SAE case the auth retry will always fail because auth_data is
missing. This patch fixes the issue.
Signed-off-by: hongwang.li <hongwang.li@sonos.com>
Android has a mechanism to extend the driver interface in vendor
specific ways. This implementation of the vendor interface is done in
$(BOARD_WPA_SUPPLICANT_PRIVATE_LIB). Extend this to allow the vendor
events to be provided to this library to facilitate the event
processing.
Introduce a new board configuration via
$(BOARD_WPA_SUPPLICANT_PRIVATE_LIB_EVENT) rather than reusing
$(BOARD_WPA_SUPPLICANT_PRIVATE_LIB) to enable this event handling in the
private library. This is to avoid compilation issues for
wpa_driver_nl80211_driver_event() with the already existing private
library implementations defined with
$(BOARD_WPA_SUPPLICANT_PRIVATE_LIB).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When an external scan is in progress on the same radio, delay the P2P
search operation based on configuration parameter p2p_search_delay. The
"search_delay" configuration done through p2p_find always takes
precedence over this delay value set due to an external scan trigger.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
NL80211_CMD_ROAM indication is scheduled via a kernel work queue, while
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_KEY_MGMT_ROAM_AUTH is a vendor event from the
driver. Thus, a race condition can exist wherein the vendor event is
received prior to the NL80211_CMD_ROAM indication.
The processing of this vendor event depends on the NL80211_CMD_ROAM
indication to update the roamed BSS/BSSID information and thus the out
of sequence processing of these events would result in not updating the
right BSS information.
This commit adds a workaround to hold the pending
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_KEY_MGMT_ROAM_AUTH event for up to 100 ms in
case NL80211_CMD_ROAM is not received first.
Signed-off-by: Purushottam Kushwaha <pkushwah@codeaurora.org>
After a disconnect command is issued, wpa_supplicant generates a
disconnection event to self and ignores the next disconnection event
coming from the driver. In a race condition in which the driver
generates a connected event due to roaming just before receiving the
disconnect command from userspace, wpa_supplicant processes the
connected event after processing the self-generated disconnection event
and enters WPA_COMPLETED state. The driver sends a disconnection event
after processing the disconnect command sent by wpa_supplicant but the
disconnection event is ignored by wpa_supplicant as the disconnection
event is considered to be a result of locally generated disconnect
command. Thus, wpa_supplicant continues to be in the connected
(WPA_COMPLETED) state though the driver is in disconnected state.
Fix this out-of-sync behavior between the driver and wpa_supplicant by
not ignoring the disconnection event from the driver because of the
locally generated disconnect command sent to the driver if there is a
connection event received after issuing the disconnect command to the
driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The response for the respective TWT operations can either be synchronous
or asynchronous (wherever specified). If synchronous, the response to
this operation is obtained in the corresponding vendor command reply to
the user space. For asynchronous case, the response is obtained as an
event with the same operation type.
Drivers shall support either of these modes but not both simultaneously.
The support for asynchronous mode is advertised through the new flag
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_FEATURE_TWT_ASYNC_SUPPORT. If the driver does not
include this flag, it shall support synchronous mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define the following additional TWT operations:
QCA_WLAN_TWT_GET_STATS, QCA_WLAN_TWT_CLEAR_STATS,
QCA_WLAN_TWT_GET_CAPABILITIES, QCA_WLAN_TWT_SETUP_READY_NOTIFY.
Also define new attributes to qca_wlan_vendor_attr_twt_setup
and qca_wlan_vendor_attr_twt_nudge.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Replace the implicit boolean checks that used int variables with use of
a more explicit bool variable type.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Support possible band combinations of 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz with
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SETBAND_MASK attribute. Ensure backwards
compatibility with old drivers that are using
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SETBAND_VALUE attribute and supporting only 2.4 GHz
and 5 GHz bands.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
The earlier workaround for UBSAN issues in commit 3b6b3ae581 ("Modify
dl_list_for_each() to not use unaligned access with WPA_TRACE") ended up
using a construction in which the type cast to the containing structure
was compared instead of the struct dl_list pointers. While that worked
around the UBSAN issue, it resulted in a comparison that gcc-10
interprets as being out of bounds for struct dl_list (which it obviously
is since this is to find the start of the containing structure).
Revert that workaround and instead, mark the struct dl_list used within
struct os_alloc_trace to have matching 16 octet alignment as the
containing structure. This is also restoring consistent design for
dl_list_for_each*().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When the driver sends a CQM RSSI threshold event, wpa_supplicant queries
the driver for the signal and noise values. However, it is possible that
by that time the station has already disconnected from the AP, so these
values are no longer valid. In this case, indicate that these values are
invalid by setting them to WPA_INVALID_NOISE.
Previously a value of 0 would be reported, which may be confusing as
this is a valid value.
Since nl80211_get_link_signal() and nl80211_get_link_noise() already set
invalid values for a case of failure, just use the value set by these
functions even if they fail.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Brian Norris <briannorris@chromium.org>
S1G beacons save a few bytes by not requiring the RSNE in beacon if RSN
BSS is configured. Handle this in wlantest by only clearing RSNE from
the BSS info if frame is a Probe Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@adapt-ip.com>
Add a new hostapd configuration parameters rssi_ignore_probe_request to
ignore Probe Request frames received with too low RSSI.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Previously hostapd would not stop transmitting when a DFS event was
detected and no available channel to switch to was available.
Disable and re-enable the interface to enter DFS state. This way, TX
does not happen until the kernel notifies hostapd about the NOP
expiring.
Signed-off-by: David Bauer <mail@david-bauer.net>
Add the ability to disable HT/VHT/HE for specific BSS from hostapd.conf.
- Add disable_11ax boolean to hostapd_bss_config.
- Change disable_11n and disable_11ac to bool in hostapd_bss_config.
- Add configuration option to set these disable_11* parameters
(which were previously used only automatically based on incompatible
security parameters to disable HT/VHT).
Signed-off-by: Shay Bar <shay.bar@celeno.com>
The hostapd DFS code deinitializes and initializes the AP interface, if
a clean channel switch is not possible. In this case the AP code paths
would deinit the driver, for example nl80211, without wpa_supplicant
code paths getting notice of this.
Therefore add callbacks for wpa_supplicant mesh methods, which are
called on init/deinit of the AP BSS. These callbacks are then used to
handle the reset in the mesh code.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
The kernel requires indication of DFS handler residing in user space
(NL80211_ATTR_HANDLE_DFS) to enable DFS channels.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <peter.oh@bowerswilkins.com>
mac80211 does not allow mgmt tx to use off channel on
DFS channels in non-ETSI domain, because it will invalidate
CAC result on current operating channel.
(mac80211 commit: 34373d12f3cbb74960a73431138ef619d857996f)
Hence don't set offchanok for mgmt tx in case of DFS channels
in non-ETSI.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <peter.oh@bowerswilkins.com>
Mesh join function is the last function to be called during mesh join
process, but it's been called a bit earlier than it's supposed to be, so
that some mesh parameter values such as VHT capabilities were not
applied correct when mesh join is in process. Moreover, the current
design of mesh join that is called directly after mesh initialization
isn't suitable for DFS channels to use, since mesh join process should
be paused until DFS CAC is done and resumed after it's done.
The callback will be called by hostapd_setup_interface_complete_sync().
There is a possibility that completing mesh init fails, so add error
handling codes for that.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <peter.oh@bowerswilkins.com>
Define QCA vendor attributes to dynamically configure TX NSS and RX NSS
to be used with QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SET_WIFI_CONFIGURATION and
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_WIFI_CONFIGURATION commands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
TWT nudge is a combination of suspend and resume in a single request.
Add TWT nudge operation and QCA vendor attributes to support
the TWT nudge request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Change struct dl_list pointer argument to const in list functions that
do not manipulate the list: dl_list_len() and dl_list_empty().
Signed-off-by: Hai Shalom <haishalom@google.com>
Use NL80211_ATTR_SAE_PWE attribute to indicate the sae_pwe value
to the driver during the NL80211_CMD_START_AP and NL80211_CMD_CONNECT
in WPA3-Personal networks which are using SAE authentication.
Signed-off-by: Rohan Dutta <drohan@codeaurora.org>
P2P usage in the 6 GHz band is not standardized yet by WFA. Disable P2P
operations in the 6 GHz band to avoid potential interop issues with
existing P2P devices in production. P2P operations in the 6 GHz band can
be reenabled later after defining standard ways to address potential
interop issues with existing P2P devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, the configuration to disable the 6 GHz band remained local
to the P2P interface. With this there is a possibility of 6 GHz channels
being included in the channel list when the channel list needs to be
updated if the state changes on one of the interfaces.
Include the configuration to disable the 6 GHz band for P2P as a global
configuration value to prevent the inclusion of 6 GHz channels in the
channel list for P2P when the channel list needs to be updated during
the state change in one of the interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Sreeramya Soratkal <ssramya@codeaurora.org>
Add support to report a vendor specific connect fail reason code fetched
from the driver to users by adding the reason code to the event
CTRL-EVENT-ASSOC-REJECT. Fetch the connect fail reason code when the
driver sends a failure connection result and append the reason code, if
available, to assoc reject event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduces a vendor specific feature capability
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_FEATURE_CONCURRENT_BAND_SESSIONS to know if the device
supports concurrent network sessions on different Wi-Fi bands. This feature
capability is attributed to the hardware's capability to support the same
(e.g., DBS).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The newer kernel versions enforce strict netlink attribute policy
validation and will cause cfg80211 to reject vendor commands with
NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA if NLA_F_NESTED attribute is not set but
if the vendor command is expecting nested data within
NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA attribute.
Most of the earlier instances were addressed by adding NLA_F_NESTED
flag in nla_nest_start(). This commit addresses the remaining
instance in which NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA is populated using data
set by user through the control interface.
Enhance the control interface VENDOR command to indicate whether the
vendor subcommand uses nested attributes within NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA
attribute or not.
Set NLA_F_NESTED flag for existing QCA vendor commands which use nested
attributes within the NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA attributes so that the
old frameworks implementations for already existing commands work
without any issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define a QCA vendor attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_WIFI_TEST_CONFIG_FULL_BW_UL_MU_MIMO to
enable/disable full bandwidth UL MU-MIMO subfield in the HE PHY
capabilities information field for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends the changes in commit c397eff828 ("Make GTK length
validation easier to analyze") to cover the RSN case as well as the WPA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use a local variable to try to make ikev2_parse_proposal() easier for
static analyzers to understand. Bounds checking in the loop is really
done by the ikev2_parse_transform() function, so the p->num_transforms
value itself is of no importance for that part and even that was already
implicitly limited in range.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous fix did not actually address this testing functionality
case correctly. Clear the peer pointer to avoid double freeing.
Fixes: a86078c876 ("TDLS: Fix error path handling for TPK M1 send failures")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When SAE is used, the local pointer pmk may point to sm->PMK. Skip the
memcpy operation in such a case since it is not really needed and use of
overlapping memory buffers is undefined behavior for memcpy().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The loop for removing unsupported bands was assuming there is always
exactly one band/mode following the removed band. That was not at all
correct, so fix this by dynamically determining how many (if any) bands
need to be moved.
Fixes: 106d67a93c ("nl80211: Filter out unsupported bands")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Local allocation error or failure to get a random number could have
resulted in the peer entry getting freed and couple of the error path
cases in callers could have tried to reference or delete the peer after
that. Fix this by tracking the errors where the peer is freed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The allocated memory pointed by the pem pointer was freed on an error
path without clearing the pointer to NULL before returning it from the
function. This could have resulted in use of freed memory in an error
case. Fix this by clearing the pointer so that the function returns NULL
properly in the case of this error.
Fixes: ace3723d98 ("DPP2: Enterprise provisioning (Enrollee)")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
DPP_CONFIGURATOR_ADD processing of the new ppkey parameter had a
copy-paste error in determining the correct length of this parameter.
Fix that by referencing the correct pointer.
Fixes: 9c1fbff074 ("DPP2: Generate a privacy protection key for Configurator")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add support for missing 6 GHz operating classes as defined in
IEEE P802.11ax/D7.0.
This is needed to avoid OCV failures on the 6 GHz band when the channel
width is larger than 20 MHz.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Previously only primary channel number used to calculate 6GHz operating
class in ieee80211_freq_to_channel_ext() and it is always giving 131
operating class. Fix this by mapping operating class using chanwidth and
sec_channel also.
This is needed to avoid OCV failures on the 6 GHz band when the channel
width is larger than 20 MHz.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
For EAP-SIM connections, reorder the order of the attributes in
EAP-Response/SIM/Start message: Send AT_IDENTITY first, then
AT_NONCE and AT_VERSION instead of AT_IDENTITY last. Even though there
is no order requirements in the RFC, some implementations expect the
order of the attributes to be exactly as described in the RFC figures.
Peer Authenticator
| |
| +------------------------------+
| | Server does not have a |
| | Subscriber identity available|
| | When starting EAP-SIM |
| +------------------------------+
| |
| EAP-Request/SIM/Start |
| (AT_ANY_ID_REQ, AT_VERSION_LIST) |
|<------------------------------------------------|
| |
| |
| EAP-Response/SIM/Start |
| (AT_IDENTITY, AT_NONCE_MT, |
| AT_SELECTED_VERSION) |
|------------------------------------------------>|
| |
Signed-off-by: Hai Shalom <haishalom@google.com>
When nlmsg allocation fails, nl80211_drv_msg() returns NULL and the call
to send_and_recv_msgs_owner() from nl80211_leave_ibss() could have ended
up dereferencing a NULL pointer. Fix this by make
send_and_recv_msgs_owner() more consistent with other send_and_recv*()
cases that check msg == NULL internally.
Fixes: 12ea7dee31 ("nl80211: Use nl80211 control port for receiving EAPOL frames")
Signed-off-by: Pooventhiran G <pooventh@codeaurora.org>
In theory, the EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() could fail, so verify that it
succeeds before using the pointer to get the group.
Fixes: 65e94351dc ("DPP2: Reconfig Authentication Request processing and Response generation")
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
If the driver indicates capability for a band that
hostapd/wpa_supplicant does not support, the struct hostapd_hw_modes
array of bands got an empty entry for that with NUM_HOSTAPD_MODES as the
mode. This resulted in various issues, e.g., with fst_hw_mode_to_band()
hitting a WPA_ASSERT(0).
Fix this by filtering out unsupported bands from the internal data
structures.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
IANA assigned the TCP port 8908 for DPP, so update the implementation to
match the formal assignment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make sae_status_success() more explicit by rejecting SAE-PK status code
when the AP is not configured with PK.
Fixes: 20ccf97b3d ("SAE-PK: AP functionality")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If SAE_CONFIG_PK is not defined and sae->pk isn't zero (which is
possible as it is controlled by the commit message status code),
sae_derive_keys() may end up deriving PMK and KCK from an
uninitialized array. Fix that.
Fixes: 6b9e99e571 ("SAE-PK: Extend SAE functionality for AP validation")
Fixes: 20ccf97b3d ("SAE-PK: AP functionality")
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
SSL_CTX_get0_certificate() returns NULL if no certificate is installed.
While this should not be the case here due to the loop in
openssl_debug_dump_certificate_chains() proceeding only if the
SSL_CTX_set_current_cert() returns success, it is safer to make
openssl_debug_dump_certificate() explicitly check against NULL before
trying to dump details about the certificate.
Signed-off-by: Pooventhiran G <pooventh@codeaurora.org>
During the build reshuffling, I missed this, so doing
'make clean' in a certain src/lib folder doesn't clean
up everything anymore. Fix that.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If wpa_supplicant is built with dynamic EAP methods,
the *.so files land here. Add them to .gitignore.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
P2P goes to Listen state while waiting for the peer to become ready for
GO Negotiation. If old listen radio work has not been completed, P2P
fails to go to listen state. This could happen in cases where P2P Action
frame transmission reused ongoing p2p-listen radio work.
p2p0: Add radio work 'p2p-listen'@0x
P2P-FIND-STOPPED
p2p0: Starting radio work 'p2p-listen'@0x after 0.010644 second wait
P2P: Use ongoing radio work for Action frame TX
P2P: Use ongoing radio work for Action frame TX
P2P: State CONNECT -> CONNECT
P2P: State CONNECT -> WAIT_PEER_IDLE
P2P: State WAIT_PEER_IDLE -> WAIT_PEER_CONNECT
P2P: Reject start_listen since p2p_listen_work already exists
P2P: Failed to start listen mode
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The connection process fails for several reasons and the status codes
defined in IEEE Std 802.11 do not cover the locally generated reason
codes. Add an attribute to QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_STA_INFO vendor
sub command which can be used by the driver/firmware to report various
additional reason codes for connection failures.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The install target at the beginning of src/eap_peer/Makefile was
confusing make about the build rules for libeap_peer.a and overriding of
the install target between src/eap_peer/Makefile and src/lib.rules was
breaking installation of dynamic EAP peer *.so files.
Fix this by lib.rules defining a default for the install target so that
src/*/Makefile can override that and by moving the install target for
eap_peer to the end of the Makefile.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to cover the HE-specific conf->he_oper_chwidth value in
addition to conf->vht_oper_chwidth.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
Some places in the code base were not using the wrappers like
hostapd_set_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx and friends. This could lead to
errors, for example when joining 80 MHz mesh networks. Fix this, by
enforcing usage of these wrappers.
wpa_supplicant_conf_ap_ht() now checks for HE capability before dealing
with VHT in order for these wrappers to work, as they first check HE
support in the config.
While doing these changes, I've noticed that the extra channel setup
code for mesh networks in wpa_supplicant/mesh.c should not be necessary
anymore and dropped it. wpa_supplicant_conf_ap_ht() should handle this
setup already.
Acked-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
This allows the privacyProtectionKey to be transferred to a new
Configurator similarly to the way c-sign-key is transferred.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use ppKey instead of C-sign-key to encrypted E-id to E'-id into Reconfig
Announcement frame on the Enrollee side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Store the received privacy protection key from Connector into
wpa_supplicant network profile and indicate it through the control
interface similarly to C-sign-key.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This provides the new privacy protection key to the Enrollee so that
this can be used to protect E-id in Reconfig Announcement frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Generate a new key for Configurator. This is either generated
automatically for the specified curve or provided from external source
with the new ppkey=<val> argument similarly to the way c-sign-key was
previously generated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
We don't really need to duplicate more of this, so just
move the lib.rules include to the end and do more of the
stuff that's common anyway there.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Derive the library name from the directory name, and let each
library Makefile only declare the objects that are needed.
This reduces duplicate code for the ar call. While at it, also
pretty-print that call.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When files change that go into a static library such as libutils.a, then
libutils.a doesn't get rebuilt from, e.g., wlantest because the
top-level Makefile just calls the library make if the library doesn't
exist yet.
Change that by making the library depend on a phony target (cannot make
it itself phony due to the pattern) so that the build will always
recurse into the library build, and check there if the library needs to
be rebuilt.
While at it, remove the (actually unnecessary) mkdir so it doesn't get
done each and every time you do 'make'.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The objs.mk include changes for archive files broke things
completely and none of the dependency files (*.d) ever got
included, as the expansion there ended up empty.
Clearly, my mistake, I should've tested that better. As we
don't need the %.a files in the list there use filter-out
to remove them, rather than what I had lazily wanted to do,
which was trying to read %.d files for them. The filter-out
actually works, and avoids looking up files that can never
exist in the first place.
Fixes: 87098d3324 ("build: Put archive files into build/ folder too")
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Setting of the PN for the receive SA failed because the SCI wasn't
provided. Fix this by adding the needed attribute to the command.
Signed-off-by: Ze Gan <ganze718@gmail.com>
Now that we no longer leave build artifacts outside the build folder, we
can clean up the gitignore a bit. Also move more things to per-folder
files that we mostly had already anyway.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This is something I hadn't previously done, but there are
cases where it's needed, e.g., building 'wlantest' and then
one of the tests/fuzzing/*/ projects, they use a different
configuration (fuzzing vs. not fuzzing).
Perhaps more importantly, this gets rid of the last thing
that was dumped into the source directories, apart from
the binaries themselves.
Note that due to the use of thin archives, this required
building with absolute paths.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
wolfSSL_X509_get_ext_d2i() returns STACK_OF(GENERAL_NAME)* for
ALT_NAMES_OID therefore wolfSSL_sk_value needs to expect a
WOLFSSL_GENERAL_NAME*.
In addition, explicitly check for NULL return from wolfSSL_sk_value().
Signed-off-by: Juliusz Sosinowicz <juliusz@wolfssl.com>
If kernel advertises a band with channels < 2.4 GHz
hostapd/wpa_supplicant gets confused and assumes this is an IEEE
802.11b, corrupting the real IEEE 802.11b band info.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@adapt-ip.com>
You can now specify BUILDDIR= on the make command line,
e.g., in order to put that into a tmpfs or similar.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If the .config file changes, basically everything needs to be
rebuilt since we don't try to detect which symbols changed or
such. Now that the .config file handling is in the common
build system, make everything depend on it if there's one.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Instead of building in the source tree, put most object
files into the build/ folder at the root, and put each
thing that's being built into a separate folder.
This then allows us to build hostapd and wpa_supplicant
(or other combinations) without "make clean" inbetween.
For the tests keep the objects in place for now (and to
do that, add the build rule) so that we don't have to
rewrite all of that with $(call BUILDOBJS,...) which is
just noise there.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This will make it easier to split out the handling in
a proper way, and handle common cflags/dependencies.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Clean up in a more common fashion as well, initially for ../src/.
Also add $(Q) to the clean target in src/
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some things are used by most of the binaries, pull them
into a common rule fragment that we can use properly.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When testing SAE reflection, the incoming commit may have the H2E status
code (126) or SAE-PK (127), but the test code in the AP was always
sending back status code 0. The STA would then reject the commit
response due to expecting H2E/SAE-PK status code.
Just reflect the incoming status code so the commit can be rejected
based on the SAE contents regardless of which variant of SAE was used.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@adapt-ip.com>
Unless debugging.
wpa_supplicant will log it failed to initialized the driver for the
interface anyway so this just silences some noise for users.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
Currently, wpa_config_set(), the function that sets wpa_supplicant
per-network properties, returns 1 when a property it attempts to set is
unchanged. Its global parallel, wpa_config_process_global(), doesn't do
this even though much of the code is very similar. Change this, and
several of the parser functions, to resemble the per-network parser and
setter functions.
Signed-off-by: Matthew Wang <matthewmwang@chromium.org>
D-Bus clients can call CreateInterface() once and use the resulting
Interface object to connect multiple times to different networks.
However, if the network interface gets added to a bridge, clients
currently have to remove the Interface object and create a new one.
Improve this by supporting the change of the BridgeIfname property of
an existing Interface object.
Signed-off-by: Beniamino Galvani <bgalvani@redhat.com>
Some legacy stations copy previously reserved RSN capability bits,
including OCVC, in (Re)Association Request frames from the AP's RSNE but
do not indicate MFP capability and/or do not send OCI in RSN handshakes.
This is causing connection failures with such erroneous STAs.
To improve interoperability with such legacy STAs allow a workaround OCV
mode to be enabled to ignore OCVC=1 from the STA if it does not follow
OCV requirements in the first protected exchange. This covers cases
where a STA claims to have OCV capability, but it does not negotiate use
of management frame protection or does not include OCI in EAPOL Key msg
2/4, FT Reassociation Request frame, or FILS (Re)Association Reqest.
The previous behavior with ocv=1 is maintained, i.e., misbehaving STAs
are not allowed to connect. When the new workaround mode is enabled with
ocv=2, the AP considers STA as OCV capable on below criteria
- STA indicates both OCV and MFP capability
- STA sends OCI during connection attempt in a protected frame
Enabling this workaround mode reduced OCV protection to some extend
since it allows misbehavior to go through. As such, this should be
enabled only if interoperability with misbehaving STAs is needed.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Modify status code in FT Reassociation Response frame from
WLAN_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED_FAILURE to WLAN_STATUS_INVALID_FTE when replying
to an invalid OCI channel info (subelement of FTE) in FT Reassociation
Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Shaakir Mohamed <smohamed@codeaurora.org>
Generate a control interface event upon receipt of DPP Presence
Announcement frames. This allows external programs to instrument hostapd
with bootstrapping information on-demand.
Signed-off-by: Andrew Beltrano <anbeltra@microsoft.com>
Define a control event with bootstrap id, frame source, frequency, and
chirp hash for receipt of Presence Announcement (chirp) frames.
Signed-off-by: Andrew Beltrano <anbeltra@microsoft.com>
When a Presence Announcement frame is received, a check is done to
ensure an ongoing auth is not in progress (!hapd->dpp_auth). A new DPP
auth is then initialized, however, when setting global configurator
params for it, the hapd->dpp_auth pointer is used which was earlier
confirmed as NULL, causing a crash in dpp_set_configurator params when
the pointer is dereferenced.
This only occurs when there are global DPP configurator params to be set
and the peer has no overriding configurator params. If no global DPP
configurator params exist, the call to dpp_set_configurator exits early
and the problem is not observed.
Fix by using the newly init'ed DPP auth structure for setting global
DPP configurator params.
Signed-off-by: Andrew Beltrano <anbeltra@microsoft.com>
DPP tech spec was modified to use v1(0) instead of v2(1) for the
OneAsymmetricKey in the Configurator backup structure to match the
description in RFC 5958 Section 2 which indicates v2 to be used when any
items tagged as version 2 are included. No such items are actually
included in this case, so v1 should be used instead.
Change OneAsymmetricKey generation to use v1(0) instead of v2(1) and
parsing to accept either version to be used. This is not backwards
compatible with the earlier implementation which requires v2(1) when
parsing the received value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The Query Response Length field was missing from GAS Initial Response
and GAS Comeback Response frames in the DPP specific code path from
hostaps GAS server. This resulted in invalid frames being used when the
DPP Config Response needed fragmentation. Fix this by adding the Query
Response Length fields into these frames.
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
Initiate SA Query for a WPS+MFP AP. STA flag checks for MFP added for
Association Request frames that use WPS IE without RSNE. This is needed
to avoid giving an opportunity to skip the protection against
disconnections when WPS is enabled.
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
crypto_bignum_init_set() might fail in case of memory allocation
failures. These two cases within sswu() did not handle that properly,
i.e., a memory allocation failure could have resulted in dereferencing a
NULL pointer. Check the return value before proceeding to fix this.
Fixes: aeb022f8e5 ("SAE: Implement hash-to-element PT/PWE crypto routines")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduce QCA_ATTR_ROAM_CONTROL_SCAN_SCHEME_TRIGGERS that represents the
triggers for which the scan scheme from enum qca_roam_scan_scheme has to
be applied.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The firmware sends a new status code to indicate an already suspended
TWT session. Update the status code enum to represent this state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Resolved the below warning
../src/ap/ieee802_11.c:4535:25: warning: 'reply_res' may be used
uninitialized in this function [-Wmaybe-uninitialized]
if (sta && ((reply_res != WLAN_STATUS_SUCCESS &&
^
Since reply_res is been assigned inside an if condition and so
compiler treats reply_res as uninitalized variable
Initialize reply_res with WLAN_STATUS_UNSPECIFIED_FAILURE.
Fixes: 5344af7d22 ("FT: Discard ReassocReq with mismatching RSNXE Used value")
Signed-off-by: Karthikeyan Kathirvel <kathirve@codeaurora.org>
The AP mode condition for initiating the SA Query procedure when
receiving a new (Re)Association Request frame used only association
state and MFP negotiation result without checking that the key exchange
has been completed. This can give rise to a corner case where the SA
Query procedure may get started after open association but before the
4-way handshake has been completed, resulting in open SA query frames
over the air.
Fix this by adding station authorized check in hostapd_notif_assoc() and
check_assoc_ies().
Signed-off-by: Rohan <drohan@codeaurora.org>
IEEE Std 802.11 specifies that the Operating Classes field terminates
immediately before the OneHundredAndThirty Delimiter (i.e., an octet
with value 130). Move the operating class value 130 last in the global
op_class array so that it gets added as the last entry into the
Supported Operating Clases element and the 6 GHz operating class is
parsed in that element by implementation that stop at the assumed
OneHundredAndThirty Delimiter.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add additional attributes to enum qca_vendor_attr_roam_control to
control the roam behavior through QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_ROAM and
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ROAMING_PARAM_CONTROL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new QCA vendor attributes to get thermal level from the driver. The
driver may return thermal level when userpace requests, or send a
thermal event when thermal level changes.
Signed-off-by: Hu Wang <huw@codeaurora.org>
Add support to skip sae_pk password check under compile flag
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS which allows AP to be configured with
sae_pk enabled but a password that is invalid for sae_pk.
Signed-off-by: Shaakir Mohamed <smohamed@codeaurora.org>
Skip check to mandate MFP capability for OCV enabled STA when OCV is
disabled in AP. This is to improve interoperability with STAs in which
OCV capability is advertised incorrectly without advertising MFP when
OCV is disabled in AP.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Enhance the return values of ocv_verify_tx_params with enum to indicate
different OCI verification failures to caller.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
This was changed in the protocol design to include nonce from both
devices, so update implementation to match.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This was changed in the protocol design to allow ke derivation to use
E-nonce, so update implementation to match.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This change adds QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_MBSSID_TX_VDEV_STATUS,
and enum for qca_wlan_vendor_attr_mbssid_tx_vdev_status to notify
Tx VDEV status.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Explicit configuration to enable TLS v1.0 and/or v1.1 did not work with
systemwide OpenSSL secpolicy=2 cases (e.g., Ubuntu 20.04). Allow such
systemwide configuration to be overridden if the older TLS versions have
been explicitly enabled in the network profile. The default behavior
follows the systemwide policy, but this allows compatibility with old
authentication servers without having to touch the systemwide policy.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new vendor attribute for GPIO configuration. In addition, document
the previously defined attributes.
Signed-off-by: Chaoli Zhou <zchaoli@codeaurora.org>
Extend DPP authentication session search for the DPP_QR_CODE command to
cover the ongoing exchanges in Controller/Responder. This was previously
done for wpa_supplicant, but not for hostapd, so complete this support
on the hostapd side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
These were not really used anymore since the AP/Relay case did not set
msg_ctx or process_conf_obj in the global DPP context. Get the
appropriate pointers more directly from the more specific data
structures instead and remove these global values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend hostapd support for DPP Controller to cover the DPP_CONTROLLER_*
cases that were previously implemented only in wpa_supplicant. This
allows hostapd/AP to be provisioned using DPP over TCP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Firmware statistics are received in the driver as opaque data. The host
target needs to send this opaque data to userspace wifistats
application. This new event is used to transfer this opaque data to the
application.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If reassoc_same_bss_optim=1 is used to optimize reassociation back to
the same BSS, it was possible for sm->pmk_len to be 0 due to a
disconnection event getting processed after sending out the
reassociation request. This resulted in wpa_sm_rx_eapol() calling
wpa_mic_len() with incorrect PMK length when PMKSA caching was being
attempted. That resulted in incorrect mic_len getting determined and not
finding the correct Key Data Length field value. This could result in
failing to complete 4-way handshake successfully.
Fix this by updating the current PMK length based on the selected PMKSA
cache entry if sm->pmk_len is not set when processing EAPOL-Key msg 1/4.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
As per RFC 8110 (Opportunistic Wireless Encryption), if the AP has the
PMK identified by the PMKID and wishes to perform PMK caching, it will
include the PMKID in the Association Response frame RSNE but does not
include the Diffie-Hellman Parameter element.
This was already addressed for most cases with owe_process_assoc_req()
not setting sta->owe_ecdh in case PMKSA caching is used. However, it was
possible to an old STA entry to maintain the initial sta->owe_ecdh value
if reassociation back to the same AP was used to initiate the PMKSA
caching attempt. Cover that case by adding an explicit check for the
time when the Association Response frame is being generated.
Signed-off-by: Chittur Subramanian Raman <craman@maxlinear.com>
SSL_add0_chain_cert() was not available in LibreSSL before version
2.9.1.
Fixes: 4b834df5e0 ("OpenSSL: Support PEM encoded chain from client_cert blob")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new QCA vendor attribute to configure the driver/firmware to
ignore SA Query timeout. If this configuration is enabled the
driver/firmware shall not send Deauthentication frame when SA Query
times out. This is required to support STA testbed role.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
These vendor attributes for FT/OCV/SAE testing can be configured only
when the STA is in connected state. Update the documentation of the
attributes to reflect the same.
Fixes: 18f3f99ac4 ("Add vendor attributes to configure testing functionality for FT/OCV/SAE")
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Add support to get number of MIC errors, missing MME incidents, and
packet replay incidents observed while using IGTK/BIGTK keys when PMF
and/or beacon protection features are enabled.
These counters are applicable only for STA mode and can be fetched
through the QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_STA_INFO vendor command.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Add support to parse the (Re)Association Response frames to check if the
AP has accepted/declined the MSCS request in response to the
corresponding (Re)Association Request frame. AP indicates the result by
setting it in the optional MSCS Status subelement of MSCS Descriptor
element in (Re)Association Response frame.
This MSCS Status subelement is defined in the process of being added
into P802.11-REVmd/D4.0 (11-20-0516-17-000m-cr-mscs-and-cid4158).
Signed-off-by: Vinita S. Maloo <vmaloo@codeaurora.org>
Add support to receive and process MSCS Response frames from the AP and
indicate the status to upper layers.
Signed-off-by: Vinita S. Maloo <vmaloo@codeaurora.org>
The function hostapd_event_ch_switch() derived the seg0_idx and seg1_idx
values only for the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz bands and the 6 GHz case ended up
using incorrect calculation based on the 5 GHz channel definitions.
Fix this by adding support for 6 GHz frequencies.
Signed-off-by: Rohan <drohan@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor subcommand QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_UPDATE_SSID
to update the new SSID in hostapd. NL80211_ATTR_SSID is used to encapsulate
the new SSID.
Signed-off-by: Pooventhiran G <pooventh@codeaurora.org>
Currently the driver/firmware indicates CCA busy time which includes own
TX and RX time and as such, does not allow the CCA busy time due to
other nodes to be computed. Add separate statistics to indicate own
radio TX time and own radio RX time to facilitate userspace applications
to compute CCA busy time because of traffic unintended to this device.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
All QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_CHANNEL_* attributes are also nested
within QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_CH_INFO, not only
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_CHANNEL_INFO* attributes in the current
implementation. Fix QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_LL_STATS_CH_INFO documentation
accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This commit does the following enhancements to the TWT interface:
Corrects the documentation for QCA_WLAN_TWT_SUSPEND and
QCA_WLAN_TWT_TERMINATE. Specifies that these operations carry the
parameters obtained through QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_TWT_PARAMS. This
interface is very recently introduced and missed to document the same.
There are no user space or driver components using this interface yet.
Hence, enhancing/modifying the interface.
Corrects the documentation for
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_TWT_SETUP_WAKE_DURATION. Mentions that the units it
represent is a multiple of 256 microseconds rather than a TU. The host
driver always interpreted this as an unit in 256 microseconds and there
are no user space implementations that are impacted with this change in
the unit. Hence, modifying the documentation.
Introduces QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_TWT_RESUME_NEXT2_TWT_SIZE, which is
similar to that of QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_TWT_RESUME_NEXT_TWT, but carries
an offset/data of u32 size.
Introduces MAC_ADDR attribute to represent the peer for the TWT setup
and resume operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While the listed unknown operating class/channel number pairs need to be
ignored, that should be done in a manner than prevents the parsed
bootstrapping info from being used as if it had no channel list (i.e.,
allowing any channel) if there are no known operating class/channel
number pairs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend DPP authentication session search for the DPP_QR_CODE command to
cover the ongoing exchanges in Controller/Responder.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The case where mutual authentication with QR Code bootstrapping is used
with scanning of the QR Code during the exchange resulted in the
Controller closing the TCP socket too early. Fix this by leaving the
socket open while waiting for the full Authentication Response message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend the DPP_CONTROLLER_START command to accept the optional qr=mutual
parameter similarly to the DPP_LISTEN case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add support to configure the number of TX chains and the number of RX
chains to be used during a connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend dpp_control_get_auth() to find the ongoing session for enterprise
credential provisioning in cases where the Controller/Configurator
initiated the exchange. Only the other direction was supported
previously.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an encrypted Enrollee identifier into Reconfig Announcement frames
and decrypt that on the Configurator side. The actual E-id value is
currently not used for anything, but it can be used in the future to
provide better control over reconfiguration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This was added to the protocol design to support cases where the
C-sign-key uses a different group than the netAccessKey. The Enrollee
now indicates its netAccessKey group in Reconfig Announcement and the
Configurator builds it own reconfig Connector using that group instead
of the group used for the C-sign-key.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This prevents use of a SAE-PK style password as the WPA-PSK passphrase
only if the same password is not also enabled through sae_password for
use with SAE-PK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduce additional attributes for the TWT response parameters from the
host driver. Also, add ATTR_TWT_RESUME_FLOW_ID for TWT Resume request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update the SAE-PK implementation to match the changes in the protocol
design:
- allow only Sec values 3 and 5 and encode this as a single bit field
with multiple copies
- add a checksum character
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add override parameters to use the specified channel while populating
OCI element in EAPOL-Key group msg 2/2, FT reassoc request, FILS assoc
request and WNM sleep request frames.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
The documentation for the QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_UDP_QOS_UPGRADE
attribute had incorrectly specified the value of 0 (corresponding to BE)
to disable the QoS upgrade. BK (1) is a lower priority AC compared to BE
and if BE is used to disable the upgrade, there would be no possibility
for configured UDP AC upgrade to replace BK-from-DSCP with BE. Thus,
correct this by specifying that the value of BK (1) is used to disable
this UDP AC upgrade.
Fixes: ebd5e764f9 ("Vendor attribute to configure QoS/AC upgrade for UDP frames")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
sae_check_confirm_pk() and sae_write_confirm_pk() were using different
checks for determining whether SAE-PK was used. It was apparently
possible to miss the checks in sae_write_confirm_pk() in some AP cases
where SAE H2E is being used. Fix this by checking sae->pk in the
write-confirm case similarly to the way this was done in check-confirm.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Debug logs did not make it clear whether the failure happens when
checking a received SAE confirm or when writing own SAE confirm. Those
cases have different checks on when to go through SAE-PK processing, so
it is useful to make this part clear in the debug log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Verify AES-CTR encryption implementation against the test vectors in
NIST SP 800-38a. This implementations was already tested against AES SIV
and EAX mode test vectors, but this adds more explicit testing against
published CTR mode test vectors.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use the "tmp_disallow" name more consistently so that both the core
wpa_supplicant functionality (struct wpa_bss_tmp_disallowed) and the
wpa_driver_ops callback have more similar names.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduce a new attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_CONFIG_UDP_QOS_UPGRADE
to configure access category override for UDP frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Introduces a vendor command to get the currently enabled band(s)
through QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GETBAND.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Also introduce a new attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SETBAND_MASK to
carry this new bitmask enum. This attribute shall consider the bitmask
combinations to define the respective band combinations and substitutes
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SETBAND_VALUE. The old attribute use remains same
as before.
In addition, document the previously undocumented, but defined,
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SETBAND.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The NL80211_ATTR_VLAN_ID attribute expects non-zero values, but vlan_id
with value 0 has been set in VLAN offload case. Due to this, station
connection failure is observed if the driver advertises VLAN_OFFLOAD
support:
nl80211: NL80211_ATTR_STA_VLAN (addr=8c:fd:f0:22:19:15 ifname=wlan0
vlan_id=0) failed: -34 (Result not representable)
wlan0: STA 8c:fd:f0:22:19:15 IEEE 802.11: could not bind the STA
entry to vlan_id=0
Fix this by setting only non-zero values.
Fixes: 0f903f37dc ("nl80211: VLAN offload support")
Signed-off-by: Seevalamuthu Mariappan <seevalam@codeaurora.org>
40/80 MHz bandwidth setting was being rejected due to incorrect sanity
check on the channel index. Fix that for the bandwidths larger than 20
MHz.
Fixes: d7c2c5c98c ("AP: Add initial support for 6 GHz band")
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Kumar Chitrapu <pradeepc@codeaurora.org>
The 0..3 value decoded from the password was not incremented to the
actual 2..5 range for Sec. This resulted in not properly detecting the
minimum password length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The channel numbering/center frequencies was changed in IEEE
P802.11ax/D6.1. The center frequencies of the channels were shifted by
10 MHz. Also, a new operating class 136 was defined with a single
channel 2. Add required support to change the channelization as per IEEE
P802.11ax/D6.1.
Signed-off-by: Wu Gao<wugao@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Vamsi Krishna <vamsin@codeaurora.org>
Check if nl80211 control port TX status is available in the kernel and
enable control port TX if so. With this feature, nl80211 control path is
able to provide the same feature set as nl80211 (management) + AF_PACKET
socket (control) before.
For debugging and testing, this can explicitly be disabled with
the driver parameter control_port_ap=0.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
The kernel commit "mac80211: support control port TX status reporting"
seems to be delivering the TX status events for EAPOL frames over
control port using NL80211_CMD_FRAME_TX_STATUS due to incorrect check on
whether the frame is a Management or Data frame. Use the pending cookie
value from EAPOL TX operation to detect this incorrect behavior and
redirect the event internally to allow it to be used to get full TX
control port functionality available for AP mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow custom ack handler to be registered and use the ext ack handler
for TX control port to fetch the cookie information. If these cookies
are not supported by the current kernel, a value of 0 is returned.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
In order to retransmit faster in AP mode, hostapd can handle TX status
notifications. When using nl80211, this is currently only possible with
socket control messages. Add support for receiving such events directly
over nl80211 and detecting, if this feature is supported.
This finally allows for a clean separation between management/control
path (over nl80211) and in-kernel data path.
A follow up commit enables the feature in AP mode.
Control port TX status contains the original frame content for matching
with the current hostapd code. Furthermore, a cookie is included, which
allows for matching against outstanding cookies in the future. This
commit only prints the cookie value for debugging purposes on TX status
receive.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
This is a preliminary patch for using extack cookies for TX control port
handling. Custom ack handler arguments for send_and_recv() and friends
is introduced therefore. This commit does not actually use the provided
values, i.e., that will be added in a separate commit.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
eap_teap_auth=2 can now be used to configure hostapd to skip Phase 2 if
the peer can be authenticated based on client certificate during Phase
1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EAP-TEAP server may skip Phase 2 if the client authentication could
be completed during Phase 1 based on client certificate. Handle this
similarly to the case of PAC use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These are needed for EAP-TEAP server and client side implementation to
allow Phase 2 to be skipped based on client certificate use during Phase
1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add events for within-ESS reassociation. This allows us to monitor roam
events, both skipped and allowed, in tests.
Signed-off-by: Matthew Wang <matthewmwang@chromium.org>
This allows the DPP_CA_SET command to be targeting a specific DPP-CST
event in cases where the Configurator did not receive the bootstrapping
information for the peer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make Configurator wait for CSR (i.e., another Config Request) when using
DPP over TCP similarly to the over Public Action frame case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This was previously covered for the DPP over Public Action frames, but
the DPP over TCP case was missed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Parse the received CSR, verify that it has been signed correctly, and
verify that the challengePassword is present and matches the derived cp.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The low level ECDSA interface is not available in BoringSSL and has been
deprecetated in OpenSSL 3.0, so move to using a higher layer EVP-based
interface for performing the ECDSA sign/verify operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add initial Enrollee functionality for provisioning enterprise (EAP-TLS)
configuration object. This commit is handling only the most basic case
and a number of TODO items remains to handle more complete CSR
generation and config object processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Try to parse the private_key blob as an ECPrivateKey in addition to the
previously supported RSA and DSA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
base64_encode_no_lf() is otherwise identical to base64_encode(), but it
does not add line-feeds to split the output.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use "client device" as the term for the device that operates under a
guidance of the device responsible for enforcing DFS rules.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Modify the check for VHT to include an option for HE in
hostapd_eid_wb_chsw_wrapper() and its callers to allow the Channel
Switch Wrapper element with the Wide Bandwidth Channel Switch subelement
to be included in Beacon and Probe Response frames when AP is operating
in HE mode without VHT.
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Move hostapd_eid_wb_chsw_wrapper() from VHT specific ieee802_11_vht.c to
ieee802_11.c since this can be used for both HE and VHT. This commit
does not change any functionality to enable the HE use case, i.e., the
function is just moved as-is.
Signed-off-by: Muna Sinada <msinada@codeaurora.org>
Operation in the 6 GHz band mandates valid HE capabilities element in
station negotiation. Reject association request upon receiving invalid
or missing HE elements.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Vendor VHT IE is used only on the 2.4 GHz band. Restrict the use of
vendor VHT element to 2.4 GHz. This will ensure that invalid/wrong user
configuration will not impact beacon data in other than the 2.4 GHz
band.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Previously, 6 GHz Band Capability element was derived from HT and VHT
capabilities of the device. Removes such unnecessary dependency by
relying directly on the HE capability.
In addition, clean up the struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_band_cap definition
to use a 16-bit little endian field instead of two 8-bit fields to match
the definition in P802.11ax.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Read mode specific HE 6 GHz capability from phy info. This is needed
for futher user config validation and IE construction.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Set the SAE-PK capability bit in RSNXE when sending out (Re)Association
Request frame for a network profile that allows use of SAE-PK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Move the FILS Public Key element and the FILS Key Confirmation element
to be separate IEs instead of being encapsulated within the SAE-PK
element. This is also removing the unnecessary length field for the
fixed-length EncryptedModifier.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This was clarified in the draft specification to not be a mandatory
requirement for the AP and STA to enforce, i.e., matching security level
is a recommendation for AP configuration rather than a protocol
requirement.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define MAC address fetching for OS X (by reusing the existing FreeBSD
implementation) to allow full compile testing of the WPS implementation
on a more BSD-like platform.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
struct ifreq does not include the ifr_netmask alternative on FreeBSD, so
replace that more specific name with ifr_addr that works with both Linux
and FreeBSD.
Fixes: 5b78c8f961 ("WPS UPnP: Do not allow event subscriptions with URLs to other networks")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While it is appropriate to try to retransmit the event to another
callback URL on a failure to initiate the HTTP client connection, there
is no point in trying the exact same operation multiple times in a row.
Replve the event_retry() calls with event_addr_failure() for these cases
to avoid busy loops trying to repeat the same failing operation.
These potential busy loops would go through eloop callbacks, so the
process is not completely stuck on handling them, but unnecessary CPU
would be used to process the continues retries that will keep failing
for the same reason.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
More than about 700 character URL ended up overflowing the wpabuf used
for building the event notification and this resulted in the wpabuf
buffer overflow checks terminating the hostapd process. Fix this by
allocating the buffer to be large enough to contain the full URL path.
However, since that around 700 character limit has been the practical
limit for more than ten years, start explicitly enforcing that as the
limit or the callback URLs since any longer ones had not worked before
and there is no need to enable them now either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The UPnP Device Architecture 2.0 specification errata ("UDA errata
16-04-2020.docx") addresses a problem with notifications being allowed
to go out to other domains by disallowing such cases. Do such filtering
for the notification callback URLs to avoid undesired connections to
external networks based on subscriptions that any device in the local
network could request when WPS support for external registrars is
enabled (the upnp_iface parameter in hostapd configuration).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use value 2 to point to RFC 5480 which describes the explicit
indicatiotion of the public key being in compressed form.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is in preparation of implementation changes to check SAE-PK
password length more accurately based on the Sec value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new sae_commit_status and sae_pk_omit configuration parameters and
an extra key at the end of sae_password pk argument can be used to
override SAE-PK behavior for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is mainly for testing purposes to allow more convenient checking of
station behavior when a transition mode is disabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
wpa_supplicant disables PMKSA caching with FT-EAP by default due to
known interoperability issues with APs. This is allowed only if the
network profile is explicitly enabling caching with
ft_eap_pmksa_caching=1. However, the PMKID for such PMKSA cache entries
was still being configured to the driver and it was possible for the
driver to build an RSNE with the PMKID for SME-in-driver cases. This
could result in hitting the interop issue with some APs.
Fix this by skipping PMKID configuration to the driver fot FT-EAP AKM if
ft_eap_pmksa_caching=1 is not used in the network profile so that the
driver and wpa_supplicant behavior are in sync for this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define QCA vendor attribute in SET(GET)_WIFI_CONFIGURATION to
dynamically configure capabilities for dynamic bandwidth adjustment.
Signed-off-by: Min Liu <minliu@codeaurora.org>
Define QCA vendor attribute in SET(GET)_WIFI_CONFIGURATION to
dynamically configure capabilities for channel width.
Signed-off-by: Min Liu <minliu@codeaurora.org>
Add support for missing driver AKM capability flags from the list of
RSN_AUTH_KEY_MGMT_* flags and make these available through the
'GET_CAPABILITY key_mgmt' control interface command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new QCA vendor attributes to configure RSNXE Used (FTE), ignore CSA,
and OCI frequency override with QCA vendor command
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_WIFI_TEST_CONFIGURATION for STA testbed role.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This maintains knowledge of whether H2E or PK was used as part of the
SAE authentication beyond the removal of temporary state needed during
that authentication. This makes it easier to use information about which
kind of SAE authentication was used at higher layer functionality.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
There is no need to update the WPS IE in Beacon frames when a
subscription is removed if that subscription is not for an actual
selected registrar. For example, this gets rids of unnecessary driver
operations when a subscription request gets rejected when parsing the
callback URLs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While this is not explicitly defined as the limit, lambda=8 (i.e., 9
characters with the added hyphen) is needed with Sec=5 to reach the
minimum required resistance to preimage attacks, so use this as an
implicit definition of the password length constraint.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Lambda >= 12 is needed with Sec = 2, so drop the shorter password
lengths in the sae_pk and module_wpa_supplicant test cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While the current implementation forces these groups to be same, that is
not strictly speaking necessary and the correct group to use here is
K_AP, not the SAE authentication group.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds AP side functionality for SAE-PK. The new sae_password
configuration parameters can now be used to enable SAE-PK mode whenever
SAE is enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds core SAE functionality for a new mode of using SAE with a
specially constructed password that contains a fingerprint for an AP
public key and that public key being used to validate an additional
signature in SAE confirm from the AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Convert the previously used text log entries to use the more formal
OCV-FAILURE prefix and always send these as control interface events to
allow upper layers to get information about unexpected operating channel
mismatches.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add hostapd configuration parameters oci_freq_override_* to allow the
OCI channel information to be overridden for various frames for testing
purposes. This can be set in the configuration and also updated during
the runtime of a BSS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
OSEN STAs are not authenticated, so do not send the actual BIGTK for
them so that they cannot generate forged protected Beacon frames. This
means that OSEN STAs cannot enable beacon protection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not include the actual GTK/IGTK value in FT protocol cases in OSEN or
with DGAF disabled (Hotspot 2.0). This was already the case for the
EAPOL-Key cases of providing GTK/IGTK, but the FT protocol case was
missed. OSEN cannot really use FT, so that part is not impacted, but it
would be possible to enable FT in a Hotspot 2.0 network that has DGAF
disabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not include the actual GTK/IGTK value in WNM Sleep Mode Response
frame if WNM Sleep Mode is used in OSEN or in a network where use of GTK
is disabled. This was already the case for the EAPOL-Key cases of
providing GTK/IGTK, but the WNM Sleep Mode exit case was missed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When a single hostapd process manages both the OWE and open BSS for
transition mode, owe_transition_ifname can be used to clone the
transition mode information (i.e., BSSID/SSID) automatically. When both
BSSs use ACS, the completion of ACS on the 1st BSS sets state to
HAPD_IFACE_ENABLED and the OWE transition mode information is updated
for all the other BSSs. However, the 2nd BSS is still in the ACS phase
and the beacon update messes up the state for AP startup and prevents
proper ACS competion.
If 2nd BSS is not yet enabled (e.g., in ACS), skip beacon update and
defer OWE transition information cloning until the BSS is enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_OEM_DATA_RESPONSE_EXPECTED
to get the response for the queried data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Verify that all associated STAs that claim support for OCV initiate an
SA Query after CSA. If no SA Query is seen within 15 seconds,
deauthenticate the STA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the OCV-FAILURE control interface event to notify upper layers of
OCV validation issues in FT and FILS (Re)Association Request frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the OCV-FAILURE control interface event to notify upper layers of
OCV validation issues in EAPOL-Key msg 2/4 and group 2/2.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new OCV-FAILURE control interface event to notify upper layers of
OCV validation issues. This commit adds this for SA Query processing in
AP mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make reporting of OCV validation failure reasons more flexible by
removing the fixed prefix from ocv_verify_tx_params() output in
ocv_errorstr so that the caller can use whatever prefix or encapsulation
that is most appropriate for each case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
To support the STA testbed role, the STA has to use specified channel
information in OCI element sent to the AP in EAPOL-Key msg 2/4, SA Query
Request, and SA Query Response frames. Add override parameters to use
the specified channel while populating OCI element in all these frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
It was possible for the RSN state machine to maintain old PMKSA cache
selection (sm->cur_pmksa) when roaming to another BSS based on
driver-based roaming indication. This could result in mismatching state
and unexpected behavior, e.g., with not generating a Suite B PMKSA cache
entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define QCA vendor attributes for SET(GET)_WIFI_CONFIGURATION to
dynamically configure capabilities for TX A-MSDU and RX A-MSDU.
Signed-off-by: Min Liu <minliu@codeaurora.org>
Add a QCA vendor subcommand QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_CONFIG_TSPEC
to add and delete TSPEC in STA mode.
The attributes defined in enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_config_tspec
are used to encapsulate required information.
Signed-off-by: Min Liu <minliu@codeaurora.org>
Add new QCA vendor attributes to configure misbehavior for PMF
protection for Management frames and to inject Disassociation frames.
These attributes are used for testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an attribute that can be used with
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_SET_WIFI_CONFIGURATION vendor command to
configure different PHY modes to the driver/firmware.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
wpa_supplicant registered to process the Radio Measurement Request
frames unconditionally. This would prevent other location based
applications from handling these frames. Enable such a use case by
allowing wpa_supplicant to be configured not to register to process
these frames. This can now be done by adding "no_rrm=1" to the
driver_param configuration parameter.
In addition, wpa_driver_nl80211_init() does not have the provision to
take driver_params. Hence, resubscribe again with cfg80211 when this
driver parameter "no_rrm=1" is set after the initial setup steps.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process HE 6 GHz band capabilities in (Re)Association Request frames and
pass the information to the driver.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Construct HE 6 GHz Band Capabilities element (IEEE 802.11ax/D6.0,
9.4.2.261) from HT and VHT capabilities and add it to Beacon, Probe
Response, and (Re)Association Response frames when operating on the 6
GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
The VHT Operation Information subfield is conditonally present, so do
not hardcoded it in struct ieee80211_he_operation. These members of the
struct are not currently used, so these can be removed without impact to
functionality.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Defines IEEE P802.11ax/D6.0, 9.4.2.261 HE 6 GHz Band Capabilities
element and 6 GHz Operation Information field of HE Operation element
(IEEE P802.11ax/D6.0, Figure 9-787k).
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@codeaurora.org>
Use a shared wpa_alg_bip() function for this and fix the case in
nl_add_key() to cover all BIP algorithms. That fix does not change any
behavior since the function is not currently used with any BIP
algorithm, but it is better to avoid surprises should it ever be needed
with IGTK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IGTK is the key that is used a BIP cipher. WPA_ALG_IGTK was the
historical name used for this enum value when only the AES-128-CMAC
based BIP algorithm was supported. Rename this to match the style used
with the other BIP options.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous implementation used mp_rand_prime() to generate a random
value in range 0..m. That is insanely slow way of generating a random
value since mp_rand_prime() is for generating a random _prime_ which is
not what is needed here. Replace that implementation with generationg of
a random value in the requested range without doing any kind of prime
number checks or loops to reject values that are not primes.
This speeds up SAE and EAP-pwd routines by couple of orders of
magnitude..
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit dd74ddd0df ("nl80211: Handle AKM suite selectors for AP
configuration") added warning log message "nl80211: Not enough room for
all AKM suites (num_suites=X > NL80211_MAX_NR_AKM_SUITES)" which in some
cases fills logs every 3 seconds, so fix this by increasing the log
message level to debug.
Reported-by: Stefan Lippers-Hollmann <s.l-h@gmx.de>
Ref: https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/openwrt/patch/20200504130757.12736-1-ynezz@true.cz/#2429246
Fixes: dd74ddd0df ("nl80211: Handle AKM suite selectors for AP configuration")
Signed-off-by: Petr Štetiar <ynezz@true.cz>
Tested-by: Stefan Lippers-Hollmann <s.l-h@gmx.de>
It is possible for drivers to report received Management frames while AP
is going through initial setup (e.g., during ACS or DFS CAC). hostapd
and the driver is not yet ready for actually sending out responses to
such frames at this point and as such, it is better to explicitly ignore
such received frames rather than try to process them and have the
response (e.g., a Probe Response frame) getting dropped by the driver as
an invalid or getting out with some incorrect information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows nl80211-based drivers to get the frame out. The old earlier
location resulted in the driver operation getting rejected before the
kernel was not ready to transmit the frame in the BSS context of the AP
interface that has not yet been started.
While getting this broadcast Deauthentication frame transmitted at the
BSS start is not critical, it is one more chance of getting any
previously associated station notified of their previous association not
being valid anymore had they missed previous notifications in cases
where the AP is stopped and restarted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
cfg80211 takes care of key removal when link/association is lost, so
there is no need to explicitly clear old keys when starting AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Linux bridging code does not allow a station mode WLAN interface in a
bridge and this prevents the AP mode scan workaround from working if the
AP interface is in a bridge and scanning can be only done by moving to
STA mode. Extend this workaround to remove the interface from the bridge
temporarily for the duration of the scan, i.e., for the same duration as
the interface needs to be moved into the station.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new hostapd control interface command "DPP_CHIRP own=<BI ID>
iter=<count>" to request chirping, i.e., sending of Presence
Announcement frames, to be started. This follows the model of similar
wpa_supplicant functionality from commit 562f77144c ("DPP2: Chirping
in wpa_supplicant Enrollee"). The hostapd case requires the AP to be
started without beaconing, i.e., with start_disabled=1 in hostapd
configuration, to allow iteration of channels needed for chirping.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Clean struct hapd_interfaces pointers and interface count during
deinitialization at the end of theh ostapd process termination so that a
call to hostapd_for_each_interface() after this does not end up
dereferencing freed memory. Such cases do not exist before this commit,
but can be added after this, e.g., for DPP needs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When hostapd is started without beaconing (start_disabled=1), Public
Action frame transmission command through nl80211 needs to allow
offchannel operations regardless of the operating channel configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This file needs the EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() compatibility wrapper just
like other DPP source code files using this function.
Fixes: 21c612017b ("DPP: Move configurator backup into a separate source code file")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The driver can advertise supported AKMs per wiphy and/or per interface.
Populate per interface supported AKMs based on the driver advertisement
in the following order of preference:
1. AKM suites advertised by NL80211_ATTR_IFTYPE_AKM_SUITES
2. AKM suites advertised by NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES
If neither of these is available:
3. AKMs support is assumed as per legacy behavior.
In addition, extend other driver interface wrappers to set the
per-interface values based on the global capability indication.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
Since this functionality was not used for anything in practice, it is
easier to simply remove this functionality completely to avoid potential
conflicts in using the kernel tree upstream commit ab4dfa20534e
("cfg80211: Allow drivers to advertise supported AKM suites").
This is practically reverting the commit 8ec7c99ee4 ("nl80211: Fetch
supported AKM list from the driver").
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
This allows DPP_AUTH_INIT to be used with tcp_addr=<dst> argument and
Configurator parameters to perform Configurator initiated DPP
provisioning over TCP. Similarly, DPP_CONTROLLER_START can now be used
to specify Configurator/Enrollee roles and extend Controller to work in
Enrollee role.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Recognize the Reconfig Announcement message type and handle it similarly
to the Presence Announcement in the Relay, i.e., send it to the first
Controller if the local Configurator does not have matching C-sign-key.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use the new struct dpp_authentication instance when setting Configurator
parameters for authentication exchange triggered by Presence
Announcement. conn->auth is NULL here and would cause dereferencing of a
NULL pointer if dpp_configurator_params is set.
Fixes: fa5143feb3 ("DPP2: Presence Announcement processing in Controller")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend Enrollee functionality to process Reconfig Authentication
Confirm message and start GAS client.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend Configurator functionality to sign a special Connector for
reconfiguration and reply with Reconfig Authentication Request frame
when Reconfig Announcement frame is received with a matching C-sign key
hash value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Check if there is a matching Configurator and be ready to initiate
Reconfig Authentication (which itself is not included in this commit).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Extend DPP chirping mechanism to allow Reconfig Announcement frames to
be transmitted instead of the Presence Announcement frames. Add a new
wpa_supplicant control interface command "DPP_RECONFIG <network id>" to
initiate reconfiguration for a specific network profile.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Split ke derivation into two parts so that the previously used
internal-only PRK gets stored as the bk in the authentication state.
This new key will be needed for deriving additional keys with DPP R2.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This removes unnecessary allocations and simplifies the implementation
by not having to remember to free the cloned reference.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Fix a copy-paste error in parsing the version info.
Fixes: 7dd768c3ca ("DPP2: Version information in bootstrapping info URI")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the local supported version information into the bootstrapping
information (V=2 in the URI) and parse this from received URI.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Report MUD URL and bandSupport from config request if those optional
nodes are included. For now, these are mainly for testing purposes since
there is no mechanism to delay sending of config response.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
When DPP v2 implementation is hardcoded to behave as v1 for testing
purposes, leave out the Protocol Version attribute form Authentication
Request instead of including it there with indication for v1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This simplifies dpp_build_conf_obj_dpp() and makes it easier to share
the signing functionality for other purposes like reconfiguration where
the Configurator needs to sign a dppCon object for itself without
generating the encapsulating config object.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
"SET dpp_version_override <ver>" can now be used to request
wpa_supplicant and hostapd to support a subset of DPP versions. In
practice, the only valid case for now is to fall back from DPP version 2
support to version 1 in builds that include CONFIG_DPP2=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not allow association to continue if the local configuration enables
PFS and the station indicates it supports PFS, but PFS was not
negotiated for the association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Do not allow association to continue if the local configuration enables
PFS and the station indicates it supports PFS, but PFS was not
negotiated for the association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new "dpp_pfs=1" entry can be used to determine whether PFS was used
during derivation of PTK when DPP AKM is negotiated for an association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Check AP's DPP Protocol Version during network introduction and mark the
PMKSA cache as suitable for PFS use with version 2 or newer. This avoids
unnecessary attempt of negotiating PFS with version 1 APs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This can be used to determine whether to try to negotiate PFS (only
available with version 2 or higher).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
IEEE 802.11 defines reason codes for indicating 4-way handshake and
group key handshake timeouts. Use those reason codes instead of the more
generic one for these particular cases in the Authenticator state
machine.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Convert driver indications to internal events to allow invalid Beacon
frames to be reported to the AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update frame processing registration for DPP Public Action frames to
include multicast reception when in DPP listen mode and the driver
indicates support for this type of explicit request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Documentation of the return values for wpa_parse_vendor_specific() and
wpa_parse_generic() were not accurate and the parsing results from these
were not really handled appropriately. There is no point in calling
wpa_parse_vendor_specific() if wpa_parse_generic() recognizes a KDE. Not
that this would break anything in practice, but still, it looks
confusing.
The part about handling wpa_parse_vendor_specific() return value can, at
least in theory, break some cases where an unexpectedly short KDE/vendor
specific element were present and something would need to be recognized
after it. That does not really happen with any standard compliant
implementation and this is unlikely to cause any real harm, but it is
clearer to handle this more appropriately even for any theoretical case,
including misbehavior of a peer device.
Instead of stopping parsing on too short vendor specific element,
continue parsing the following KDEs/IEs. Skip the
wpa_parse_vendor_specific() call when a KDE has been recognized. Also
fix the return value documentation for wpa_parse_generic() and remove
the useless return value from wpa_parse_vendor_specific().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
We have practically started requiring some C99 features, so might as
well finally go ahead and bring in the C99 bool as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() compatibility wrapper is used only within
CONFIG_DPP2 blocks, so define it with matching condition.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This has no changes to the function itself, i.e., it is just moved to a
location that is above the first caller.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
drv->eapol_sock is used only for receiving EAPOL frames in AP mode, so
it is not needed when using control port for EAPOL frame RX.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since this nl80211 mechanism for sending EAPOL frames does not currently
support TX status notification, disable it by default of AP mode where
the Authenticator state machine uses those notifications to optimize
retransmission. The control port TX can be enabled for AP mode with
driver param control_port_ap=1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use and/or set socker owner where necessary to allow EAPOL frames to be
received using the nl80211 control port. This is done when the driver
indicates support for the control port without previous hardcoded
reception of RSN preauth frames.
Use methods which set or use the connection owner nl_sock * where
necessary. Initial operations need to register with the SOCKET_OWNER
attribute set (e.g., connect for STA mode). Final operations need to use
the socket which holds the owner attribute (e.g., disconnect for STA
mode).
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
This commit creates a connect nl_sock * for every bss unconditionally.
It is used in the next commit for nl80211 control port RX.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
nl80211 control port event handling previously did not differentiate
between EAPOL and RSN preauth ethertypes. Add checking of the ethertype
and report unexpected frames (only EAPOL frames are supposed to be
delivered through this path).
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
This is needed since the initial implementation of the control port
mechanism in the kernel mixed in RSN pre-authentication ethertype
unconditionally (and IMHO, incorrectly) into the control port.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a build flag CONFIG_NO_TKIP=y to remove all TKIP functionality from
hostapd and wpa_supplicant builds. This disables use of TKIP as both the
pairwise and group cipher. The end result does not interoperate with a
WPA(v1)-only device or WPA+WPA2 mixed modes.
Signed-off-by: Disha Das <dishad@codeaurora.org>
Allow hostapd to be requested to override the RSNXE Used subfield in FT
reassociation case for testing purposes with "ft_rsnxe_used=<0/1/2>"
where 0 = no override, 1 = override to 1, and 2 = override to 0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The only l2_packet use within this file was removed by commit
d12dab4c6f ("nl80211: Use non-receiving socket for EAPOL TX").
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Allow wpa_supplicant to be requested to override the RSNXE Used subfield
in FT reassociation case for testing purposes with "SET ft_rsnxe_used
<0/1/2>" where 0 = no override, 1 = override to 1, and 2 = override to
0.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Discard the FT Reassociation Request frame instead of rejecting it
(i.e., do not send Reassociation Response frame) if RSNXE Used is
indicated in FTE, but no RSNXE is included even though the AP is
advertising RSNXE.
While there is not really much of a difference between discarding and
rejecting the frame, this discarding behavior is what the standard says
for this type of an error case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SPECTRAL_SCAN_CONFIG_FREQUENCY_2
for describing the secondary 80 MHz span of agile spectral scan.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The "FT: Ignore extra data in end" hexdump is quite confusing since it
shows all the IEs that were actually either processed or forwarded.
There is no code path that could reach this debug print with actual real
extra data. Remove it and the dead increment of pos to avoid warnings
from static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow STA entry to be removed and re-added to the driver with PMF is
used with FT. Previously, this case resulted in cfg80211 rejecting STA
entry update after successful FT protocol use if the association had not
been dropped and it could not be dropped for the PMF case in
handle_auth().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Mark own bootstrap information as having been used in NFC negotiated
connection handover and do not accept non-mutual authentication when
processing Authentication Response from the peer when such bootstrapping
information is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Connector alone is not sufficient for authentication during
reconfiguration, so store the netAccessKey as well.
Fixes: e4eb009d98 ("DPP2: Add Connector and C-sign-key in psk/sae credentials for reconfig")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
While the Diffie-Hellman Parameter element is defined in RFC 8110
explicitly for use witht he OWE AKM, it has now been proposed to be used
with another AKM (DPP). Should any other AKM be extended in similar
manner in the future, the check against unexpected use could result in
additional interoperability issues. Remove that and instead, ignore the
unexpected Diffie-Hellman Parameter element if it is included in
(Re)Association Request frame when any other AKM is negotiated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the Enrollee indicates support for DPP R2 or newer, add Connector and
C-sign-key in psk/sae credentials (i.e., cases where DPP AKM is not
enabled) for reconfiguration. Extend processing of such credentials in
wpa_supplicant network profile addition to handle this new case
correctly by not setting key_mgmt=DPP based on Connector being present,
but by looking at the actual akm value in the config object.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define a driver interface event for Beacon frame protection failures.
Report such events over the control interface and send a
WNM-Notification Request frame to the AP as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add HE override support under the build parameter CONFIG_HE_OVERRIDES=y.
The disable_he=1 network profile parameter can be used to disable HE.
This requires a fallback to VHT on the 5 GHz band and to HT on the 2.4
GHz band.
There is no nl80211 support for configuring the driver to disable HE, so
for now, this applies only to IBSS and mesh cases.
Signed-off-by: P Praneesh <ppranees@codeaurora.org>
In repeater mode remote AP may request channel switch to a new channel.
Check if DFS is required for the new channel before proceeding with
normal AP operations. Start CAC procedure if radar detection is required
and channel is not yet marked as available.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
Add a new hostapd_is_dfs_overlap() helper function to DFS module. This
function tells whether the selected frequency range overlaps with DFS
channels in the current hostapd configuration. Selected frequency reange
is specified by its center frequency and bandwidth.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
Rename DFS helper hostapd_config_dfs_chan_available() to
hostapd_is_dfs_chan_available(). Enable access to this helper function
from other hostapd components.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
EVP_PKEY_get0_EC_KEY() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0, so add a
compatibility wrapper for it when building with OpenSSL 1.0.2.
Fixes: c025c2eb59 ("DPP: DPPEnvelopedData generation for Configurator backup")
Fixes: 7d9e320054 ("DPP: Received Configurator backup processing")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new skip_prune_assoc=1 parameter can be used to configure hostapd
not to prune associations from other BSSs operated by the same process
when a station associates with another BSS. This can be helpful in
testing roaming cases where association and authorization state is
maintained in an AP when the stations returns.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new driver param full_ap_client_state=0 can be used to test
functionality with the driver capability for full AP client state being
forced to be disabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use local variables to avoid sm->wpa_auth->conf type of dereferences
where multiple instances within a function can be cleaned up.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Drivers that trigger roaming need to know the lifetime and reauth
threshold time of configured PMKSA so that they can trigger full
authentication to avoid unnecessary disconnection. To support this, send
dot11RSNAConfigPMKLifetime and dot11RSNAConfigPMKReauthThreshold values
configured in wpa_supplicant to the driver while configuring a PMKSA.
Signed-off-by: Veerendranath Jakkam <vjakkam@codeaurora.org>
The new hostapd configuration parameter dpp_pfs can be used to specify
how PFS is applied to associations. The default behavior (dpp_pfs=0)
remains same as it was previously, i.e., allow the station to decide
whether to use PFS. PFS use can now be required (dpp_pfs=1) or rejected
(dpp_pfs=2).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add definition for HE bit in neighbor report BSSID Information field
from IEEE P802.11ax/D6.0, 9.4.2.36 Neighbor Report element.
Signed-off-by: Sathishkumar Muruganandam <murugana@codeaurora.org>
This functionality was repeated for multiple different frames. Use a
shared helper function to avoid such duplication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process the received Presence Announcement frames in Controller. If a
matching bootstrapping entry for the peer is found, initiate DPP
authentication to complete provisioning of the Enrollee.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process the received Presence Announcement frames in AP/Relay. If a
matching bootstrapping entry for the peer is found in a local
Configurator, that Configurator is used. Otherwise, the frame is relayed
to the first configured Controller (if available).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process received Presence Announcement frames and initiate
Authentication exchange if matching information is available on the
Configurator.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new hostapd configuration parameter
dpp_configurator_connectivity=1 to request Configurator connectivity to
be advertised for chirping Enrollees.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new wpa_supplicant control interface command "DPP_CHIRP own=<BI
ID> iter=<count>" to request chirping, i.e., sending of Presence
Announcement frames, to be started.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new identifier definitions for presence announcement,
reconfiguration, and certificate enrollment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
"DPP_BOOTSTRAP_SET <ID> <configurator parameters..>" can now be used to
set peer specific configurator parameters which will override any global
parameters from dpp_configurator_params.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is a more convenient way of addressing cases where a
Configurator/Controller may store a large number of peer bootstrapping
information instances and may need to manage different configuration
parameters for each peer while operating as the Responder.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Set the global pointer and msg_ctx when allocating struct
dpp_authentication instead of needing to pass these to
dpp_set_configurator().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
hostapd (and wpa_supplicant in AP mode) was internally updating the STA
flags on disconnection cases to remove authorization and association.
However, some cases did not result in immediate update of the driver STA
entry. Update all such cases to send out the update to the driver as
well to reduce risk of race conditions where new frames might be
accepted for TX or RX after the port authorization or association has
been lost and configured keys are removed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Check whether the Transition Disable KDE is received from an
authenticated AP and if so, whether it contains valid indication for
disabling a transition mode. If that is the case, update the local
network profile by removing the less secure options.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new hostapd configuration parameter transition_disable can now be
used to configure the AP to advertise that use of a transition mode is
disabled. This allows stations to automatically disable transition mode
by disabling less secure network profile parameters.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Define the OUI Type and bitmap values for Transition Disable KDE. These
will be shared by both the AP and STA implementations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_CFR_NDPA_NDP_ALL in enum
qca_wlan_vendor_cfr_capture_type. This capture type requests all NDPA
NDP frames to be filtered.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
hostapd will trigger EDMG auto channel selection by setting
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_EDMG_ENABLED. The 60 GHz driver will be
called to start an auto channel selection and will return the
primary channel and the EDMG channel.
Signed-off-by: Noam Shaked <nshaked@codeaurora.org>
Addition of chan_2ghz_or_5ghz_to_freq() broke 60 GHz ACS, because it
assumes reported ACS channel is on either 2.4 or 5 GHz band. Fix this
by converting chan_2ghz_or_5ghz_to_freq() to a more generic
chan_to_freq(). The new function uses hw_mode to support 60 GHz.
Fixes: 41cac481a8 ("ACS: Use frequency params in ACS (offload) completed event interface")
Signed-off-by: Noam Shaked <nshaked@codeaurora.org>
The parameters that need to be applied are symmetric to those of VHT,
however the validation code needs to be tweaked to check the HE
capabilities.
Signed-off-by: Shashidhar Lakkavalli <slakkavalli@datto.com>
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Enhanced channel frequency response supports capturing of channel status
information based on RX. Define previous CFR as version 1 and enhanced
CFR as version 2. If target supports both versions, two versions can't
be enabled at same time. Extend attributes for enhanced CFR capture in
enum qca_wlan_vendor_peer_cfr_capture_attr.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Support Extended Key ID in wpa_supplicant according to
IEEE Std 802.11-2016 for infrastructure (AP) associations.
Extended Key ID allows to rekey pairwise keys without the otherwise
unavoidable MPDU losses on a busy link. The standard is fully backward
compatible, allowing STAs to also connect to APs not supporting it.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Support Extended Key ID in hostapd according to IEEE Std 802.11-2016.
Extended Key ID allows to rekey pairwise keys without the otherwise
unavoidable MPDU losses on a busy link. The standard is fully backward
compatible, allowing an AP to serve STAs with and without Extended Key
ID support in the same BSS.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
This is more consistent with the other eloop registrations and avoids a
theoretical integer overflow with 16-bit int should more than 32767
sockets/signals/events be registered.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is more consistent with the other eloop registrations and avoids a
theoretical integer overflow with 16-bit int should more than 32767
sockets be registered (which is not really going to happen in practice).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This avoids a theoretical integer overflow with 16-bit unsigned int
should a certificate be encoded with more that 65535 friendly names or
icons.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is more consistent with the other eloop registrations and avoids a
theoretical integer overflow with 16-bit int (not that there would ever
be more that 32767 signal handlers getting registered).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no point in starting a huge number of pending SA Queries, so
limit the number of pending queries to 1000 to have an explicit limit
for how large sa_query_count can grow.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While RADIUS messages are limited to 4 kB, use size_t to avoid even a
theoretical overflow issue with 16-bit int.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the kernel rtm_newlink or rtm_dellink send the maximum length of
ifname (IFNAMSIZ), the event handlers in
wpa_driver_nl80211_event_rtm_addlink() and
wpa_driver_nl80211_event_rtm_dellink() did not copy the IFLA_IFNAME
value. Because the RTA_PAYLOAD (IFLA_IFNAME) length already includes the
NULL termination, that equals the IFNAMSIZ.
Fix the condition when IFNAME reach maximum size.
Signed-off-by: Ouden <Ouden.Biz@gmail.com>
Add more hang reason codes for the hang reason in the
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_HANG events. This also introduces the
attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_HANG_REASON_DATA to carry the required
data for the respective hang reason. This data is expected to contain
the required dump to analyze the reason for the hang.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Some APs have managed to add two SSID elements into Beacon frames and
that used to result in picking the last one which had incorrect data in
the known examples of this misbehavior. Pick the first one to get the
correct SSID.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was not supposed to be conditional on CONFIG_FILS.
Fixes: ecbf59e693 ("wpa_supplicant configuration for Beacon protection")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
int_array_concat() and int_array_add_unique() could potentially end up
overflowing the int type variable used to calculate their length. While
this is mostly theoretical for platforms that use 32-bit int, there
might be cases where a 16-bit int overflow could be hit. This could
result in accessing memory outside buffer bounds and potentially a
double free when realloc() ends up freeing the buffer.
All current uses of int_array_add_unique() and most uses of
int_array_concat() are currently limited by the buffer limits for the
local configuration parameter or frame length and as such, cannot hit
this overflow cases. The only case where a long enough int_array could
be generated is the combination of scan_freq values for a scan. The
memory and CPU resource needs for generating an int_array with 2^31
entries would not be realistic to hit in practice, but a device using
LP32 data model with 16-bit int could hit this case.
It is better to have more robust checks even if this could not be
reached in practice, so handle cases where more than INT_MAX entries
would be added to an int_array as memory allocation failures instead of
allowing the overflow case to proceed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd configuration parameter no_beacon_rsnxe=1 can be used to
remove RSNXE from Beacon frames. This can be used to test protection
mechanisms for downgrade attacks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous design for adding RSNXE into FT was not backwards
compatible. Move to a new design based on 20/332r3 to avoid that issue
by not include RSNXE in the FT protocol Reassociation Response frame so
that a STA not supporting RSNXE can still validate the FTE MIC
correctly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous design for adding RSNXE into FT was not backwards
compatible. Move to a new design based on 20/332r3 to avoid that issue
by not include RSNXE in the FT protocol Reassociation Request frame so
that an AP not supporting RSNXE can still validate the FTE MIC
correctly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Verify that the AP included RSNXE in Beacon/Probe Response frames if it
indicated in FTE that RSNXE is used. This is needed to protect against
downgrade attacks based on the design proposed in 20/332r3.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Verify that the STA includes RSNXE if it indicated in FTE that RSNXE is
used and the AP is also using RSNXE. This is needed to protect against
downgrade attacks based on the design proposed in 20/332r3.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is a workaround needed to keep FT protocol backwards compatible for
the cases where either the AP or the STA uses RSNXE, but the other one
does not. This commit adds setting of the new field to 1 in
Reassociation Request/Response frame during FT protocol when the STA/AP
uses RSNXE in other frames. This mechanism is described in 20/332r3.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add key configuration parameters needed to support Extended Key ID with
pairwise keys. Add a driver capability flag to indicate support forusing
this.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
wpa_parse_kde_ies(), i.e., the only caller to wpa_parse_generic(),
verifies that there is room for KDE Length field and pos[1] (that
length) octets of payload in the Key Data buffer. The PMKID KDE case
within wpa_parse_generic() was doing an unnecessary separate check for
there being room for the Length, OUI, and Data Type fields. This is
covered by the check in the calling function with the combination of
verifying that pos[1] is large enough to contain RSN_SELECTOR_LEN +
PMKID_LEN octets of payload.
This is confusing since no other KDE case was checking remaining full
buffer room within wpa_parse_generic(). Clean this up by removing the
unnecessary check from the PMKID KDE case so that all KDEs are handled
consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_parse_generic() can now recognize the Key ID KDE that will be needed
to deliver the Key ID of the pairwise key when Extended Key ID is used.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
KEY_FLAG_MODIFY was initial added for the planned Extended Key ID
support with commit a919a26035 ("Introduce and add key_flag") and then
removed with commit 82eaa3e688 ("Remove the not yet needed
KEY_FLAG_MODIFY") to simplify commit e9e69221c1 ("Validity checking
function for key_flag API").
Add it again and update check_key_flag() accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
The actual TX status (whether ACK frame was received) was not included
in the debug log in AP mode. Add that for all cases. In addition, add
some more details in the debug log to make the log more helpful in
debugging issues related to frame delivery.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While 13.7.1 (FT reassociation in an RSN) in P802.11-REVmd/D3.0 did not
explicitly require this to be done, this is implied when describing the
contents of the fourth message in the FT authentication sequence (see
13.8.5). Furthermore, 20/332r2 is proposing an explicit validation step
to be added into 13.7.1.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 5f9b4afd ("Use frequency in HT/VHT validation steps done before
starting AP") modified hostapd_is_usable_edmg() to use freq instead of
channel numbers. Unfortunately, it did not convert the frequency
calculation correctly and this broke EDMG functionality.
Fix the frequency calculation so that EDMG channel 9 works again.
Fixes: 5f9b4afdfa ("Use frequency in HT/VHT validation steps done before starting AP")
Signed-off-by: Hrishikesh Vidwans <hvidwans@codeaurora.org>
Check whether an error is reported from any of the functions that could
in theory fail and if so, do not proceed with the partially filled SAE
commit buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In theory, hmac_sha256() might fail, so check for that possibility
instead of continuing with undetermined index value that could point to
an arbitrary token entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The return value from nl80211_send_monitor() is not suitable for use
with strerror(). Furthermore, nl80211_send_monitor() itself is printing
out a more detailed error reason.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
send_and_recv_msgs() returns a negative number as the error code and
that needs to be negated for strerror().
Fixes: 8759e9116a ("nl80211: Control port over nl80211 helpers")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
send_auth_reply() could be called with sta == NULL in certain error
conditions. While that is not applicable for this special test
functionality for SAE, the inconsistent checks for the sta pointer could
result in warnings from static analyzers. Address this by explicitly
checking the sta pointer here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
mode->he_capab is an array and as such, there is no point in checking
whether it is NULL since that cannot be the case. Check for the
he_supported flag instead. In addition, convert the TWT responder
capability bit into a fixed value 1 to avoid any surprising to the
callers. In practice, neither of these changes results in different
behavior in the current implementation, but this is more robust.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There was a copy-paste error in this code that would be adding the
connectorTemplate once that becomes available. In practice, this was not
reachable code, but anyway, this should be ready for potential addition
of connectorTemplate in the future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While there may have initially been cases where the RSNE from
Beacon/Probe Response frames was not available from some drivers, it is
now more valuable to notice if such a case were to be hit with drivers
that are always expected to have such information available. As such,
make it a fatal error if the scan results for the current AP are not
available to check the RSNE/RSNXE in EAPOL-Key msg 3/4.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid printing confusing FT debug entries from wpa_sm_set_ft_params()
when FT is not actually used for the connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use the same reason code to indicate that IE different in 4-way
handshake and also print a hexdump of RSNXE in both Beacon/ProbeResp and
EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 in the log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd configuration parameter rsne_override_eapol can now be
used similarly to the previously added rsnxe_override_eapol to override
(replace contents or remove) RSNE in EAPOL-Key msg 3/4. This can be used
for station protocol testing to verify sufficient checks for RSNE
modification between the Beacon/Probe Response frames and EAPOL-Key msg
3/4.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previous implementation was determining whether the override value was
set based on its length being larger than zero. Replace this with an
explicit indication of whether the parameter is set to allow zero length
replacement, i.e., remove of RSNXE from EAPOL-Key msg 3/4.
In addition, move IE replacement into a more generic helper function to
allow this to be used with other IEs as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The 4-address frames WDS design in mac80211 uses VLAN interfaces
similarly to the way VLAN interfaces based on VLAN IDs are used. The EAP
authentication case ended up overriding the WDS specific assignment even
when the RADIUS server did not assign any specific VLAN for the STA.
This broke WDS traffic.
Fix this by skipping VLAN assignment to VLAN ID 0 for STAs that have
been detected to use 4-address frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The resource-load-started cannot be used to replace the older
resource-request-starting signal and as such, the final redirect to the
special http://localhost:12345/ URL did not work. Use the decide-policy
signal for navigation action instead.
Also remove the attempt to modify the request URI from
resource-load-started since that is not going to work either. This is
not really critical for functionality, but could eventually be replaced
with a handler for the WebKitWebPage send-request signal.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_tdls_set_key() did set the key_id to -1 to avoid a useless
NL80211_CMD_SET_KEY call that the updated nl80211 driver no longer
carries out. Remove the no longer required workaround.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
After a radar signal is detected, the AP should switch to another
channel, but in the case of 80+80 MHz, channel switch failed because
hostapd did not select the secondary channel in the process. Fix this by
selecting a secondary channel in the case of 80+80 MHz.
Signed-off-by: Xin Wang <xwangw@codeaurora.org>
Signed-off-by: Pravas Kumar Panda <kumarpan@codeaurora.org>
The initial implementation of the PTK derivation workaround for
interoperability with older OWE implementations forced
WPA_KEY_MGMT_PSK_SHA256 to be used for all of PTK derivation. While that
is needed for selecting which hash algorithm to use, this was also
changing the length of the PTK components and by doing so, did not
actually address the backwards compatibility issue.
Fix this by forcing SHA256 as the hash algorithm in PTK derivation
without changing the PTK length calculation for OWE when
owe_ptk_workaround is enabled.
Fixes: 65a44e849a ("OWE: PTK derivation workaround in AP mode")
Fixes: 8b138d2826 ("OWE: PTK derivation workaround in STA mode")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Migrate nl80211 driver to key_flag API and add additional sanity checks.
I'm still not sure why we install unicast WEP keys also as default
unicast keys. Based on how I understand how mac80211 handles that it
should be pointless. I just stuck to how we do things prior to the patch
for WEP keys to not break anything. After all other drivers may need it.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Always report an error when NL80211_CMD_SET_KEY can't set a key to
default.
The old ioctl-based design used a single command to add, set, and delete
a key and had to ignore ENOENT for key deletions. It looks like that
special handling was also ported for NL80211_CMD_NEW_KEY and
NL80211_CMD_SET_KEY instead only for NL80211_CMD_DEL_KEY.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Calling NL80211_CMD_NEW_KEY with NL80211_KEY_DEFAULT_TYPES attributes is
pointless. The information is not expected and therefore the kernel
never forwards it to the drivers. That attribute is used with
NL80211_CMD_SET_KEY.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Allow to abort key installations with different error codes and fix one
misleading return code.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Turns out we are sometime providing a seq when deleting the key. Since
that makes no sense on key deletion let's stop forwarding that to the
driver at least.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Add masks for each key type to define which flags can be combined and
add a helper function to validate key_flag values.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
I decided to drop KEY_FLAG_MODIFY instead of allowing flag combinations not
yet used in the code and will simply recreate it with the Extended Key
ID patches once we get there. For that reason I also did not renumber
the flags.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
hostapd_broadcast_wep_set() can be called without a WEP key set.
Don't try to install a default key in that case.
This patch is not critical for the new API. With key_flag we just would
report an (ignored) error and do nothing. With the patch we simply do
nothing.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
The unicast parameter in set_wep_key() is only expected to be set to 0
or 1. Without this patch we set unicast to 0x80 instead of 1. Since
unicast is used as boolean that is working fine but violates the
documented API.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
This clears the AuthorizedMACs advertisement immediately when the
Selected Registrar timeout is hit and no more active PINs are present.
Previously, the AuthorizedMACs advertisement could remain in place
indefinitely since expired PINs were removed only when actually trying
to find a PIN for a new WPS exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This makes it easier to understand what is happening when a new channel
needs to be selected based on a radar detection event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Upon radar detection we used to search channels with the same bandwidth.
This way we might not find any other channels. If there are no channels
available with that bandwidth the AP service will be stopped. To avoid
this problem, also search a suitable channel by downgrading the
bandwidth. This scenario is applicable during CAC as well.
Signed-off-by: Seevalamuthu Mariappan <seevalam@codeaurora.org>
In the normal case hostapd_disable_iface() and hostapd_enable_iface()
will be done while switching to another DFS channel upon radar
detection. In certain scenarios radar detected event can come while
hostapd_disable_iface() is in progress and iface->current_mode will be
NULL in that scenario. Previously, we did not check for this scenario
and proceeded with the radar detection logic which can trigger a
segmentation fault. To fix this, avoid proceeding the radar detection
event if iface->current_mode is NULL.
Signed-off-by: Seevalamuthu Mariappan <seevalam@codeaurora.org>
The commit a34ca59e (SAE: Allow SAE password to be configured separately
(STA)) added sae_password configuration option. We should also consider
sae_password in the wpa_config_write() function which stores the valid
network block details to an external database.
Fixes: a34ca59e4d ("SAE: Allow SAE password to be configured separately (STA)")
Signed-off-by: Sachin Shelke <sachin.shelke@nxp.com>
Signed-off-by: Cathy Luo <xiaohua.luo@nxp.com>
Signed-off-by: Ganapathi Bhat <ganapathi.bhat@nxp.com>
There is no support for using the control port for sending out EAPOL
frames through privsep yet, so mask out this capability to fall back to
the l2_packet based design.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add support for element defragmentation as defined in IEEE
P802.11-REVmd/D3.0, 10.28.12 (Element defragmentation).
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
IEEE P802.11az/D2.0 renamed the FILS Wrapped Data element,
removing the FILS prefix. Change the code accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
To support PASN authentication flow, where Authentication frames are
sent by wpa_supplicant using the send_mlme() callback, modify the logic
to also send EVENT_TX_STATUS for Authentication frames.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
PASN authentication can be performed while a station interface is
connected to an AP. To allow sending PASN frames while connected, extend
the send_mlme() driver callback to also allow a wait option. Update the
relevant drivers and wpa_supplicant accordingly.
hostapd calls for send_mlme() are left unchanged, since the wait option
is not required there.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
If the driver requires external SAE authentication, it would result in
registration for all Authentication frames, so even non-SAE
Authentication frames might be forwarded to user space instead of being
handled internally. Fix this by using a more strict match pattern,
limiting the registration to the SAE authentication algorithm only.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
WEP should not be used for anything anymore. As a step towards removing
it completely, move all WEP related functionality to be within
CONFIG_WEP blocks. This will be included in builds only if CONFIG_WEP=y
is explicitly set in build configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
WEP provisioning was removed from WPS v2, so this workaround
functionality has not been applicable. Remove it completely.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already supported in the offload ACS case and this commit
completes support for this with the internal ACS algorithm.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
Set iface->current_mode and iface->conf->hw_mode when completing ACS
based on the selected channel in the hw_mode=any case.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
Add suitable channel frequencies from all modes into the scan parameters
when a single mode is not specified for ACS. This is preparation for
being able to support hw_mode=any to select the best channel from any
supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
This is preparation for being able to support hw_mode=any to select the
best channel from any supported mode.
Signed-off-by: Neo Jou <neojou@gmail.com>
While the users of os_random() do not really need strong pseudo random
numebrs, there is no significant harm in seeding random() with data from
os_get_random(), i.e., /dev/urandom, to get different sequence of not so
strong pseudo random values from os_random() for each time the process
is started.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since SAE PMK can be updated only by going through a new SAE
authentication instead of being able to update it during an association
like EAP authentication, do not allow PMKSA entries to be used for
caching after the reauthentication threshold has been reached. This
allows the PMK to be updated without having to force a disassociation
when the PMK expires if the station roams between the reauthentication
threshold and expiration timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Since SAE PMK can be updated only by going through a new SAE
authentication instead of being able to update it during an association
like EAP authentication, do not allow PMKSA entries to be used for OKC
after the reauthentication threshold has been reached. This allows the
PMK to be updated without having to force a disassociation when the PMK
expires if the station roams between the reauthentication threshold and
expiration timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
SAE authentication derives PMKID differently from the EAP cases. The
value comes from information exchanged during SAE authentication and
does not bind in the MAC addresses of the STAs. As such, the same PMKID
is used with different BSSIDs. Fix both the hostapd and wpa_supplicant
to use the previous PMKID as is for OKC instead of deriving a new PMKID
using an incorrect derivation method when using an SAE AKM.
This fixes use of opportunistic key caching with SAE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
wpa_ctrl.h can be installed separately with libwpa_client, so
utils/common.h won't be available to its users.
Signed-off-by: Andrej Shadura <andrew.shadura@collabora.co.uk>
Add an attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_SCAN_DWELL_TIME for specifying
dwell time in the QCA vendor scan command. This is a common value which
applies across all frequencies requested in the scan.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This attribute enables/disables the host driver to send roam reason
information in the Reassociation Request frame to the AP in the same
ESS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Couple of the attributes were defined with inconsistent prefix in the
name (missing "CONFIG_"). Fix these to use the common prefix for all
enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_config values. Add defined values for the
incorrect names to avoid issues with existing users.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new capability flag based on the nl80211 feature advertisement and
start using the new default key type for Beacon protection. This enables
AP mode functionality to allow Beacon protection to be enabled. This is
also enabling the previously added ap_pmf_beacon_protection_* hwsim test
cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The cookie values for UDP control interface commands was defined as a
static global array. This did not allow multi-BSS test cases to be
executed with UDP control interface. For example, after
hapd1 = hostapd.add_bss(apdev[0], ifname1, 'bss-1.conf')
hapd2 = hostapd.add_bss(apdev[0], ifname2, 'bss-2.conf')
hapd1->ping() did not work.
Move those cookie values to per-instance location in struct
hapd_interfaces and struct hostapd_data to fix this.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@gmail.com>
Rekeying a pairwise key using only keyid 0 (PTK0 rekey) has many broken
implementations and should be avoided when using or interacting with
one. The effects can be triggered by either end of the connection and
range from hardly noticeable disconnects over long connection freezes up
to leaking clear text MPDUs.
To allow affected users to mitigate the issues, add a new configuration
option "wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey" to replace all PTK0 rekeys with fast
reconnects.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Rekeying a pairwise key using only keyid 0 (PTK0 rekey) has many broken
implementations and should be avoided when using or interacting with
one. The effects can be triggered by either end of the connection and
range from hardly noticeable disconnects over long connection freezes up
to leaking clear text MPDUs.
To allow affected users to mitigate the issues, add a new hostapd
configuration option "wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey" to replace all PTK0 rekeys
with disconnection. This requires the station to reassociate to get
connected again and as such, can result in connectivity issues as well.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
The CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag provided by nl80211 can be used to detect if
the card/driver is explicitly indicating capability to rekey STA PTK
keys using only keyid 0 correctly.
Check if the card/driver supports it and make the status available as a
driver flag.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
The MBO PMF check for AP SME in the driver case was added into a
location that is skipped for WPS processing. That was not really the
correct place for this since the skip_wpa_check label was supposed to
remain immediately following the WPA checks. While this does not really
have much of a practical impact, move the check around so that the
skip_wpa_check label remains where it is supposed to be.
Fixes: 4c572281ed ("MBO: Mandate use of PMF for WPA2+MBO association (AP)")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Save RM enabled capability element of an associating station when
hostapd use the device AP SME similarly to how this information is saved
with SME-on-hostapd cases. This allows radio measurement operations
(e.g., REQ_BEACON) to be used.
Signed-off-by: Ouden <Ouden.Biz@gmail.com>
This element is not used in Beacon or Probe Response frames (which is
the reason why the standard does not indicate where exactly it would be
in those frames..); HT Operation element has this information and so
does Extended CSA element.
In practice, this reverts the functionality added in commit 76aab0305c
("Add secondary channel IE for CSA").
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Hardcoded CONFIG_IEEE80211N to be included to clean up implementation.
More or less all new devices support IEEE 802.11n (HT) and there is not
much need for being able to remove that functionality from the build.
Included this unconditionally to get rid of one more build options and
to keep things simpler.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Split the IEs from WPA authenticator state machine into separately added
IEs so that the exact location between these and other elements can be
controlled. This fixes the location of MDE and RSNXE in Beacon and Probe
Response frames. In addition, this swaps the order of BSS Load and RM
Enabled Capabilities elements in Beacon frames to get them into the
correct order (which was already used for Probe Response frames).
Furthermore, this fixes the buffer end checks for couple of elements to
make the implementation more consistent (though, in practice, there is
no impact from this since the old size limit was smaller than needed,
but still sufficiently large to have room for these).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new wpa_supplicant network profile configuration parameter
beacon_prot=<0/1> to allow Beacon protection to be enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new hostapd configuration parameter beacon_prot=<0/1> to allow
Beacon protection to be enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
nla_nest_start() might fail, so need to check its return value similarly
to all the other callers.
Fixes: a84bf44388 ("HE: Send the AP's OBSS PD settings to the kernel")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously only couple of AKM suite selectors were converted into
NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES. Add rest of the AKM suites here. However, since
the current kernel interface has a very small limit
(NL80211_MAX_NR_AKM_SUITES = 2), add the attribute only when no more
than that limit entries are included. cfg80211 would reject the command
with any more entries listed.
This needs to be extended in cfg80211/nl80211 in a backwards compatible
manner, so this seems to be the best that can be done for now in user
space. Many drivers do not use this attribute, so must not reject the
configuration completely when larger number of AKM suites is configured.
Such cases may not work properly with drivers that depend on
NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is needed to work around a missing attribute that would cause
cfg80211 to reject some nl80211 commands (e.g.,
NL80211_ATTR_VENDOR_DATA) with new kernel versions that enforce netlink
attribute policy validation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Use a single block each for webkit and webkit2 signal handlers. This
cleans up browser.c to have clear sections for each webkit API version.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid unnecessary warnings from webkit on calling gtk_main_quit() more
than once for a single gtk_main() call. This is also fixing an issue for
a corner case where the very first URL has special purpose (osu:// or
http://localhost:12345).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous implementation of hovering-over-link signal handler did not
really work with webkit2, so replace this with mouse-target-changed
handler.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hs20_web_browser() was previously hardcoded to not perform strict TLS
server validation. Add an argument to this function to allow that
behavior to be configured. The hs20-osu-client users are still using the
old behavior, i.e., not validating server certificates, to be usable for
testing purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
SM Power Save was described in somewhat unclear manner in IEEE Std
802.11n-2009 as far the use of it locally in an AP to save power. That
was clarified in IEEE Std 802.11-2016 to allow only a non-AP STA to use
SMPS while the AP is required to support an associated STA doing so. The
AP itself cannot use SMPS locally and the HT Capability advertisement
for this is not appropriate.
Remove the parts of SMPS support that involve the AP using it locally.
In practice, this reverts the following commits:
04ee647d58 ("HT: Let the driver advertise its supported SMPS modes for AP mode")
8f461b50cf ("HT: Pass the smps_mode in AP parameters")
da1080d721 ("nl80211: Advertise and configure SMPS modes")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Set the proper bits inside the extended capabilities field to indicate
support for TWT responder.
Tested-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Signed-off-by: Mikhail Karpenko <karpenko@fastmail.com>
The HE Operation field for BSS color consists of a disabled, a partial,
and 6 color bits. The original commit adding support for BSS color
considered this to be a u8. This commit changes this to the actual
bits/values.
This adds an explicit config parameter for the partial bit. The disabled
is set to 0 implicitly if a bss_color is defined.
Interoperability testing showed that stations will require a BSS color
to be set even if the feature is disabled. Hence the default color is 1
when none is defined inside the config file.
Signed-off-by: John Crispin <john@phrozen.org>
Commit 2bab073dfe ("WPS: Add new PSK entries with wps=1 tag") added
this when writing the new entry into a file, but the in-memory update
did not get the tag. Add it there as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Now that hostapd wpa_psk_file has a new tag for identifying PSKs that
can be used with WPS, add that tag to new entries for PSKs from WPS.
This makes it clearer where the PSK came from and in addition, this
allows the same PSK to be assigned if the same Enrollee goes through WPS
provisioning again.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
By default, when configuration file set wpa_psk_file, hostapd generated
a random PSK for each Enrollee provisioned using WPS and appended that
PSK to wpa_psk_file.
Changes that behavior by adding a new step. WPS will first try to use a
PSK from wpa_psk_file. It will only try PSKs with wps=1 tag.
Additionally it'll try to match enrollee's MAC address (if provided). If
it fails to find an appropriate PSK, it falls back to generating a new
PSK.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Jankowski <tomasz.jankowski@plume.com>
In the function owe_assoc_req_process(), values assigned to the reason
argument imply that it should be renamed to status. Rename 'reason' to
'status' and modify the uses of owe_assoc_req_process() accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
This commit adds new attributes for getting the Probe Response frame
IEs, Beacon frame IEs and the disconnection reason codes through
get_sta_info vendor command.
The host driver shall give this driver specific reason code through
the disconnection reason code attribute
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_GET_STA_DRIVER_DISCONNECT_REASON.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This acts as an event from the host driver to the user space to notify
the driver specific reason for a disconnection. The host driver
initiates the disconnection for various scenarios (beacon miss, Tx
Failures, gateway unreachability, etc.) and the reason codes from
cfg80211_disconnected() do not carry these driver specific reason codes.
Host drivers should trigger this event immediately prior to triggering
cfg80211_disconnected() to allow the user space to correlate the driver
specific reason code with the disconnect indication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This acts as a vendor event and is used to update the information
of a station from the driver to userspace.
Add an attribute for the driver to update the channels scanned in
the last connect/roam attempt.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Some of the operating classes added in the 6 GHz band have a larger
number of channels included in them (e.g., operating class 131 has 59
channels). Increase the maximum number of channels per operating class
so that all channels will get populated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This attribute aims to configure the STA to send the Beacon Report
Response with failure reason for the scenarios where the Beacon Report
Request cannot be handled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This ugly hack for being able to search for optional arguments with
space before them was quite inconvenient and unexpected. Clean this up
by handling this mess internally with a memory allocation and string
duplication if needed so that the users of wpa_supplicant control
interface do not need to care about such details.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
As qca_vendor.h alone can be included by other applications, define
macro BIT() in qca_vendor.h itself if not yet defined, e.g., by
including utils/common.h before qca_vendor.h.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
wlantest build did not define build options to determine key management
values for SAE, OWE, and DPP. Add those and the needed SHA512 functions
to be able to decrypt sniffer captures with PMK available from an
external source.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
(Re)Association Response frames should include radio measurement
capabilities in order to let stations know if they can, e.g., use
neighbor requests.
I tested this commit with a Samsung S8, which does not send neighbor
requests without this commit and sends them afterwards.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
A driver supports FT if it either supports SME or the
NL80211_CMD_UPDATE_FT_IES command. When selecting AKM suites,
wpa_supplicant currently doesn't take into account whether or not either
of those conditions are met. This can cause association failures, e.g.,
when an AP supports both WPA-EAP and FT-EAP but the driver doesn't
support FT (wpa_supplicant will decide to do FT-EAP since it is unaware
the driver doesn't support it). This change allows an FT suite to be
selected only when the driver also supports FT.
Signed-off-by: Matthew Wang <matthewmwang@chromium.org>
Reviewed-by: Brian Norris <briannorris@chromium.org>
The new sae_pwe=3 mode can be used to test non-compliant behavior with
SAE Password Identifiers. This can be used to force use of
hunting-and-pecking loop for PWE derivation when Password Identifier is
used. This is not allowed by the standard and as such, this
functionality is aimed at compliance testing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This was not supposed to set the constructed bit in the header. Fix this
to avoid parsing issues with other ASN.1 DER parsers.
Fixes: c025c2eb59 ("DPP: DPPEnvelopedData generation for Configurator backup")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make Configurator provisioning require explicit conf parameter enabling
similarly to the previously used conf=ap-* and conf=sta-* cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This avoids unexpected behavior if GAS query fails and the Config
Response does not get processed at all. Previously, this could result in
configuration being assumed to be successful instead of failure when
Config Response object was not received at all. That could result in
undesired Config Result frame transmission with DPP Rel 2 and not
clearing the ongoing DPP session.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, unexpected Authentication Confirm messages were ignored in
cases where no Authentication Confirm message was expected at all, but
if this message was received twice in a state where it was expected, the
duplicated version was also processed. This resulted in unexpected
behavior when authentication result was processed multiple times (e.g.,
two instances of GAS client could have been started).
Fix this by checking auth->waiting_auth_conf before processing
Authetication Confirm. That boolean was already tracked, but it was used
only for other purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Only one peer-commit-scalar value was stored for a specific STA (i.e.,
one per MAC address) and that value got replaced when the next SAE
Authentication exchange was started. This ended up breaking the check
against re-use of peer-commit-scalar from an Accepted instance when
anti-clogging token was requested. The first SAE commit message (the one
without anti-clogging token) ended up overwriting the cached
peer-commit-scalar value while leaving that instance in Accepted state.
The second SAE commit message (with anti-clogging token) added ended up
getting rejected if it used the same value again (and re-use is expected
in this particular case where the value was not used in Accepted
instance).
Fix this by using a separate pointer for storing the peer-commit-scalar
value that was used in an Accepted instance. There is no need to
allocate memory for two values, i.e., it is sufficient to maintain
separate pointers to the value and move the stored value to the special
Accepted state pointer when moving to the Accepted state.
This fixes issues where a peer STA ends up running back-to-back SAE
authentication within couple of seconds, i.e., without hostapd timing
out the STA entry for a case where anti-clogging token is required.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, hostapd ignored the secondary channel provided by ACS if
both HT40+ and HT40- are set in hostapd.conf. This change selects such
channel for HT40 if it's valid, which is more reasonable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The internal WMM AC parameters use just the exponent of the CW value,
while nl80211 reports the full CW value. This led to completely bogus
CWmin/CWmax values in the WMM IE when a regulatory limit was present.
Fix this by converting the value to the exponent before passing it on.
Fixes: 636c02c6e9 ("nl80211: Add regulatory wmm_limit to hostapd_channel_data")
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@nbd.name>
nl80211 uses a different queue mapping from hostap, so AC indexes need
to be converted.
Fixes: 636c02c6e9 ("nl80211: Add regulatory wmm_limit to hostapd_channel_data")
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@nbd.name>
The size of a single route(4) message cannot be derived from
either the size of the AF_INET or AF_INET6 routing tables.
Both could be empty or very large.
As such revert back to a buffer size of 2048 which mirrors
other programs which parse the routing socket.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
Now that both hostapd and wpa_supplicant react to interface flag
changes, there is no need to set or remove IFF_UP.
It should be an administrative flag only.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
There is little point in having both and it brings interface
addition/removal and IFF_UP notifications to hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Roy Marples <roy@marples.name>
When external authentication is used, the station send mlme frame (auth)
to the driver may not be able to get the frequency (bss->freq) after
hostap.git commit b6f8b5a9 ("nl80211: Update freq only when CSA
completes"). Use the assoc_freq to send the MLME frame when SAE external
authentication is used to avoid this issue.
Signed-off-by: Ouden <Ouden.Biz@gmail.com>
This commit introduces additional stats to query through
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_UPDATE_STA_INFO.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This adds support for generating an encrypted backup of the local
Configurator information for the purpose of enrolling a new
Configurator. This includes all ASN.1 construction and data encryption,
but the configuration and connector template values in
dpp_build_conf_params() are not yet complete.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Process the received DPPEnvelopedData when going through Configurator
provisioning as the Enrollee (the new Configurator). This parses the
message, derives the needed keys, and decrypts the Configurator
parameters. This commit stores the received information in
auth->conf_key_pkg, but the actually use of that information to create a
new Configurator instance will be handled in a separate commit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
There is no need for the Protocol Version attribute in Authentication
Response if the peer is a DPP R1 device since such device would not know
how to use this attribute. To reduce risk for interoperability issues,
add this new attribute only if the peer included it in Authentication
Request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add an attribute QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_RTPLINST_PRIMARY_FREQUENCY for
primary channel center frequency in the definition for Representative
Tx Power List (RTPL) list entry instance. This is required for 6 GHz
support, since the 6 GHz channel numbers overlap with existing 2.4 GHz
and 5 GHz channel numbers thus requiring frequency values to uniquely
identify channels.
Mark QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_RTPLINST_PRIMARY as deprecated if both the
driver and user space application support 6 GHz. For backward
compatibility, QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_RTPLINST_PRIMARY is still used if
either the driver or user space application or both do not support the
6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The recent addition of the X.509v3 certificatePolicies parser had a
copy-paste issue on the inner SEQUENCE parser that ended up using
incorrect length for the remaining buffer. Fix that to calculate the
remaining length properly to avoid reading beyond the end of the buffer
in case of corrupted input data.
Credit to OSS-Fuzz: https://bugs.chromium.org/p/oss-fuzz/issues/detail?id=20363
Fixes: d165b32f38 ("TLS: TOD-STRICT and TOD-TOFU certificate policies")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Make the selected channel available for upper layer software to use,
e.g., when starting DPP listen operation during NFC negotiated
connection handover.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add new control interface commands "DPP_NFC_HANDOVER_REQ own=<id>
uri=<URI>" and "DPP_NFC_HANDOVER_SEL own=<id> uri=<URI>" to support NFC
negotiated connection handover. These commands are used to report a DPP
URI received from a peer NFC Device in Handover Request and Handover
Select messages. The commands return peer bootstrapping information ID
or FAIL on failure. The returned ID is used similarly to any other
bootstrapping information to initiate DPP authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The new dpp_gen_uri() helper function can be used to build the
bootstrapping URI from locally stored information. This can be used to
make it easier to update the URI, e.g., for NFC negotiated connection
handover cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This increases the limit of how many data fragments can be supported
with the internal HMAC implementation. The previous limit was hit with
some FT use cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit introduces the vendor event
QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_REQUEST_SAR_LIMITS_EVENT.
Host drivers can request user space application to set SAR power
limits with this event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add a new QCA vendor attribute to set thermal level to the driver from
userspace. The driver/firmware takes actions requested by userspace to
mitigate high temperature such as throttling TX etc. The driver may
choose the level of throttling and other actions for various thermal
levels set by userspace.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Initial OWE implementation used SHA256 when deriving the PTK for all OWE
groups. This was supposed to change to SHA384 for group 20 and SHA512
for group 21. The new owe_ptk_workaround=1 network parameter can be used
to enable older behavior mainly for testing purposes. There is no impact
to group 19 behavior, but if enabled, this will make group 20 and 21
cases use SHA256-based PTK derivation which will not work with the
updated OWE implementation on the AP side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Initial OWE implementation used SHA256 when deriving the PTK for all OWE
groups. This was supposed to change to SHA384 for group 20 and SHA512
for group 21. The new owe_ptk_workaround parameter can be used to enable
workaround for interoperability with stations that use SHA256 with
groups 20 and 21. By default, only the appropriate hash function is
accepted. When workaround is enabled (owe_ptk_workaround=1), the
appropriate hash function is tried first and if that fails, SHA256-based
PTK derivation is attempted. This workaround can result in reduced
security for groups 20 and 21, but is required for interoperability with
older implementations. There is no impact to group 19 behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previous implementation was hardcoding use of SHA256 PMK-to-PTK
derivation for all groups. Replace that with hash algorithm selection
based on the length of the prime similarly to the way this was done for
other derivation steps in OWE.
This breaks backwards compatibility when using group 20 or 21; group 19
behavior remains same.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The previous commit had a rebasing issue that ended up covering only the
center_segment0 != 0 case. These were supposed to apply for all 6 GHz
band cases.
Fixes: 0bfc04b8d0 ("Do not enable HT/VHT when operating in 6 GHz band")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
IEEE P802.11-REVmd was modified to use a container IE for anti-clogging
token whenver H2E is used so that parsing of the SAE Authentication
frames can be simplified.
See this document for more details of the approved changes:
https://mentor.ieee.org/802.11/dcn/19/11-19-2154-02-000m-sae-anti-clogging-token.docx
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Some things in bfd.h that we use were renamed, and in the case of
bfd_get_section_vma() a parameter was dropped. Work around this.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add support for EAP method prefix in the anonymous identity
used during EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' authentication when encrypted IMSI
is used. The prefix is a single character that indicates which
EAP method is required by the client.
Signed-off-by: Hai Shalom <haishalom@google.com>
Based on the now documented seg0/seg1 values from offloaded ACS, there
is a mismatch between the driver interface and internal hostapd use.
The value of segment0 field in ACS results is the index of the channel
center frequency for 20 MHz, 40 MHz, and 80M Hz channels. The value is
the center frequency index of the primary 80 MHz segment for 160 MHz and
80+80 MHz channels.
The value of segment1 field in ACS results is zero for 20 MHz, 40 MHz,
and 80 MHz channels. The value is the index of the channel center
frequency for 160 MHz channels and the center frequency index of the
secondary 80 MHz segment for 80+80 MHz channels.
However, in struct hostapd_config, for 160 MHz channels, the value of
the segment0 field is the index of the channel center frequency of 160
MHz channel and the value of the segment1 field is zero. Map the values
from ACS event into hostapd_config fields accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Update the documentation with values to be sent for seg0 and seg1 fields
in external ACS result event for 20 MHz, 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, and
80+80 MHz channels. These values match the changes done to definitions
of seg0 and seg1 fields in the IEEE 802.11 standard.
This vendor command had not previously been documented in this level of
detail and had not actually been used for the only case that could have
two different interpretation (160 MHz) based on which version of IEEE
802.11 standard is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The Channel Width field value is 0 for 20 MHz, 1 for 40 MHz, 2 for 80
MHz, and 3 for both 160 MHz and 80+80 MHz channels. The 80+80 MHz case
was not addressed previously correctly since it cannot be derived from
seg0 only.
The Channel Center Frequency Segment 0 field value is the index of
channel center frequency for 20 MHz, 40 MHz, and 80 MHz channels. The
value is the center frequency index of the primary 80 MHz segment for
160 MHz and 80+80 MHz channels.
The Channel Center Frequency Segment 1 field value is zero for 20 MHz,
40 MHz, and 80 MHz channels. The value is the index of the channel
center frequency for 160 MHz channel and the center frequency index of
the secondary 80 MHz segment for 80+80 MHz channels.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Make the dummy hostapd_hw_mode_txt() wrapper return "UNKNOWN" instead of
NULL to avoid a warning from a debug printf using %s with NULL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add the new set_key() parameter "key_flag" to provide more specific
description of what type of a key is being configured. This is needed to
be able to add support for "Extended Key ID for Individually Addressed
Frames" from IEEE Std 802.11-2016. In addition, this may be used to
replace the set_tx boolean eventually once all the driver wrappers have
moved to using the new key_flag.
The following flag are defined:
KEY_FLAG_MODIFY
Set when an already installed key must be updated.
So far the only use-case is changing RX/TX status of installed
keys. Must not be set when deleting a key.
KEY_FLAG_DEFAULT
Set when the key is also a default key. Must not be set when
deleting a key. (This is the replacement for set_tx.)
KEY_FLAG_RX
The key is valid for RX. Must not be set when deleting a key.
KEY_FLAG_TX
The key is valid for TX. Must not be set when deleting a key.
KEY_FLAG_GROUP
The key is a broadcast or group key.
KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE
The key is a pairwise key.
KEY_FLAG_PMK
The key is a Pairwise Master Key (PMK).
Predefined and needed flag combinations so far are:
KEY_FLAG_GROUP_RX_TX
WEP key not used as default key (yet).
KEY_FLAG_GROUP_RX_TX_DEFAULT
Default WEP or WPA-NONE key.
KEY_FLAG_GROUP_RX
GTK key valid for RX only.
KEY_FLAG_GROUP_TX_DEFAULT
GTK key valid for TX only, immediately taking over TX.
KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE_RX_TX
Pairwise key immediately becoming the active pairwise key.
KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE_RX
Pairwise key not yet valid for TX. (Only usable with Extended Key ID
support.)
KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE_RX_TX_MODIFY
Enable TX for a pairwise key installed with KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE_RX.
KEY_FLAG_RX_TX
Not a valid standalone key type and can only used in combination
with other flags to mark a key for RX/TX.
This commit is not changing any functionality. It just adds the new
key_flag to all hostapd/wpa_supplicant set_key() functions without using
it, yet.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
This is the function that actually uses the parameters, so pass the full
parameter struct to it instead of hiding the struct from it in the
simple wrapper.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
If the driver supports VLAN offload mechanism with a single netdev, use
that instead of separate per-VLAN netdevs.
Signed-off-by: Gurumoorthi Gnanasambandhan <gguru@codeaurora.org>
Add indication for driver VLAN offload capability and configuration of
the VLAN ID to the driver.
Signed-off-by: Gurumoorthi Gnanasambandhan <gguru@codeaurora.org>
This is in preparation for adding support to use a single WLAN netdev
with VLAN operations offloaded to the driver. No functional changes are
included in this commit.
Signed-off-by: Gurumoorthi Gnanasambandhan <gguru@codeaurora.org>
This makes it more convenient to add, remove, and modify the parameters
without always having to update every single driver_*.c implementation
of this callback function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
sae_confirm_immediate=2 can now be used in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y
builds to minimize the latency between SAE Commit and SAE Confirm by
postponing transmission of SAE Commit until the SAE Confirm frame is
generated. This does not have significant impact, but can get the frames
tiny bit closer to each other over the air to increase testing coverage.
The only difference between sae_confirm_immediate 1 and 2 is in the
former deriving KCK, PMK, PMKID, and CN between transmission of the
frames (i.e., a small number of hash operations).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Correct the check for presence of
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_VHT_SEG1_CENTER_CHANNEL attribute before using it
while processing acs_result event.
Fixes: 857d94225a ("Extend offloaded ACS QCA vendor command to support VHT")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Test: wpa_supplicant module tests
../src/utils/utils_module_tests.c:933:7: runtime error: left shift of 1 by 31 places cannot be represented in type 'int'
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
Returned policies from X509_get_ext_d2i() need to be freed.
Fixes: 21f1a1e66c ("Report TOD policy")
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This is mainly for testing purposes to allow wpa_supplicant and hostapd
functionality to be tested both with and without using the nl80211
control port which is by default used whenever supported by the driver.
control_port=0 driver parameter will prevent that from happening.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows EAPOL frames to be received over the separate controlled
port once rest of the driver interface is ready for this. By itself,
this commit does not actually change behavior since cfg80211 will not be
delivering these events without them being explicitly requested.
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
In order to correctly encrypt rekeying frames, wpa_supplicant now checks
if a PTK is currently installed and sets the corresponding encrypt
option for tx_control_port().
Signed-off-by: Markus Theil <markus.theil@tu-ilmenau.de>
Linux kernel v4.17 added the ability to request sending controlled port
frames (e.g., IEEE 802.1X controlled port EAPOL frames) via nl80211
instead of a normal network socket. Doing this provides the device
driver with ordering information between the control port frames and the
installation of keys. This empowers it to avoid race conditions between,
for example, PTK replacement and the sending of frame 4 of the 4-way
rekeying handshake in an RSNA. The key difference between the specific
control port and normal socket send is that the device driver will
certainly get any EAPOL frames comprising a 4-way handshake before it
gets the key installation call for the derived key. By flushing its TX
buffers it can then ensure that no pending EAPOL frames are
inadvertently encrypted with a key that the peer will not yet have
installed.
Add a CONTROL_PORT flag to the hostap driver API to report driver
capability for using a separate control port for EAPOL frames. This
operation is exactly like an Ethernet send except for the extra ordering
information it provides for device drivers. The nl80211 driver is
updated to support this operation when the device reports support for
NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CONTROL_PORT_OVER_NL80211. Also add a driver op
tx_control_port() for request a frame to be sent over the controlled
port.
Signed-off-by: Brendan Jackman <brendan.jackman@bluwireless.co.uk>
This was used only for FT RRB sending with driver_test.c and
driver_test.c was removed more than five years ago, so there is no point
in continuing to maintain this driver op.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Application Extension attribute is defined in WSC tech spec v2.07 page
104. Allow hostapd to be configured to add this extension into WPS IE in
Beacon and Probe Response frames. The implementation is very similar to
vendor extension.
A new optional entry called "wps_application_ext" is added to hostapd
config file to configure this. It enodes the payload of the Application
Extension attribute in hexdump format.
Signed-off-by: Veli Demirel <veli.demirel@airties.com>
Signed-off-by: Bilal Hatipoglu <bilal.hatipoglu@airties.com>
Since NL80211_CMD_FRAME does not allow encryption to be disabled for the
frame, add a monitor interface temporarily for cases where this type of
no-encrypt frames are to be sent. The temporary monitor interface is
removed immediately after sending the frame.
This is testing functionality (only in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds)
that is used for PMF testing where the AP can use this to inject an
unprotected Robust Management frame (mainly, Deauthentication or
Disassociation frame) even in cases where PMF has been negotiated for
the association.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd gtk_rsc_override and igtk_rsc_override configuration
parameters can be used to set an override value for the RSC that the AP
advertises for STAs for GTK/IGTK. The contents of those parameters is a
hexdump of the RSC in little endian byte order.
This functionality is available only in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds.
This can be used to verify that stations implement initial RSC
configuration correctly for GTK/ and IGTK.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
I saw a case where the kernel's cfg80211 rejected hostapd's attempt to
send a neighbor report response because nl80211 flagged the frame as
offchannel-OK, but kernel rejects because channel was 100 (DFS) and so
kernel failed thinking it was constrained by DFS/CAC requirements that
do not allow the operating channel to be left (at least in FCC).
Don't set the packet as off-channel OK if we are transmitting on the
current operating channel of an AP to avoid such issues with
transmission of Action frames.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
This is to match the NL80211_CMD_ACTION renaming to NL80211_CMD_FRAME
that happened long time ago. This command can be used with any IEEE
802.11 frame and it should not be implied to be limited to Action
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace a separate cookie_out pointer argument with save_cookie boolean
since drv->send_action_cookie is the only longer term storage place for
the cookies. Merge all nl80211_send_frame_cmd() callers within
wpa_driver_nl80211_send_mlme() to use a single shared call to simplify
the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Merge this function into wpa_driver_nl80211_send_mlme() that is now the
only caller for the previously shared helper function. This is a step
towards cleaning up the overly complex code path for sending Management
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All the previous users have now been converted to using send_mlme() so
this unused send_frame() callback can be removed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since send_mlme() now has support for the no_encrypt argument it is
possible to get rid of the remaining send_frame() uses.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows send_mlme() to be used to replace send_frame() for the test
cases where unencrypted Deauthentication/Disassociation frames need to
be sent out even when using PMF for the association. This is currently
supported only when monitor interface is used for AP mode management
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Merge hostapd_drv_send_mlme_csa() functionality into
hostapd_drv_send_mlme() to get a single driver ops handler function for
hostapd. In addition, add a new no_encrypt parameter in preparation for
functionality that is needed to get rid of the separate send_frame()
driver op.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
send_frame() is documented to be used for "testing use only" and as
such, it should not have used here for a normal production
functionality. Replace this with use of send_mlme() which is already
used for sending Deauthentication frames in other cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Call nl80211_send_monitor() directly instead of going through
wpa_driver_nl80211_send_frame() for the case where monitor interface is
used for AP mode management purposes. drv->use_monitor has to be 1 in
this code path, so wpa_driver_nl80211_send_frame() was calling
nl80211_send_monitor() unconditionally for this code path and that extra
function call can be removed here to simplify the implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Netlink dump message may be interrupted if an internal inconsistency is
detected in the kernel code. This can happen, e.g., if a Beacon frame
from the current AP is received while NL80211_CMD_GET_SCAN is used to
fetch scan results. Previously, such cases would end up not reporting an
error and that could result in processing partial data.
Modify this by detecting this special interruption case and converting
it to an error. For the NL80211_CMD_GET_SCAN, try again up to 10 times
to get the full response. For other commands (which are not yet known to
fail in similar manner frequently), report an error to the caller.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
libnl functions return a library specific error value in libnl 2.0 and
newer. errno is not necessarily valid in all error cases and strerror()
for the returned value is not valid either.
Use nl_geterror() to get the correct error string from the returned
error code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
libnl functions return a library specific error value. errno is not
necessarily valid in all error cases and strerror() for the returned
value is not valid either.
Use nl_geterror() to get the correct error string from the returned
error code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This simplifies code by not having to maintain and come up with new
backwards compatibility wrappers for a library release from 12 years
ago.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These are certainly not error conditions, but normal cases for starting
up. Drop the message from ERROR to DEBUG.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add PMKSA candidates from scan results only if they advertise an AKMP
that is used with RSN pre-authentication. Previously, candidates were
added but then ignored later if the AKMP was not suitable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit changes the failover behavior of RADIUS client. Commit
27ebadccfb ("RADIUS client: Cease endless retry for message for
multiple servers") changed the retry logic, causing RADIUS client to
wait RADIUS_CLIENT_NUM_FAILOVER + 1 timeouts before failing over the
first time. Prior to that commit, RADIUS client would wait
RADIUS_CLIENT_NUM_FAILOVER timeouts before each failover. This was
caused by moving the entry->attempts > RADIUS_CLIENT_NUM_FAILOVER
comparison to before the retry attempt, where entry->attempts is
incremented.
The commit in question set entry->attempts in radius_change_server to 1
instead of 0, so RADIUS client would still only wait
RADIUS_CLIENT_NUM_FAILOVER timeouts for subsequent failovers, the same
as the original behavior.
This commit changes the comparison so the initial failover now happens
after waiting RADIUS_CLIENT_NUM_FAILOVER timeouts, as it did originally.
It also changes the RADIUS_CLIENT_MAX_FAILOVER comparison to prevent an
additional attempt to the primary server after the final failover.
Signed-off-by: Ethan Everett <ethan.everett@meraki.net>
Add function that returns whether WoWLAN has been enabled for the device
or not.
Signed-off-by: Alfonso Sanchez-Beato <alfonso.sanchez-beato@canonical.com>
ieee802_11_allowed_address() did not really do anything useful for the
call from handle_probe_req(), so replace that with a direct call to
hostapd_allowed_address() and make ieee802_11_allowed_address() a static
function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When returning from handle_auth() after ieee802_11_allowed_address()
returned HOSTAPD_ACL_ACCEPT, but before ieee802_11_set_radius_info() has
been called, identity, radius_cui, and psk might not have been consumed.
Fix this by avoiding the need to free these variables at all.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
For FT protocol to work, the BSSs need to be operating an FT AKM with
the same SSID and mobility domain. The previous commit covered the
mobility domain, this covers the other prerequisites. This reduces
unnecessary load from having to allocate queued messages for interfaces
that cannot have valid data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Fast BSS Transition requires related APs operating in the same mobility
domain. Therefore, we can check whether the local managed BSS is
operating the same mobility domain before sending multicast/unicast
messages to it. This reduces unnecessary load from having to allocate
queued messages for interfaces that cannot have valid data.
Signed-off-by: Jinglin Wang <bryanwang@synology.com>
Signed-off-by: MinHong Wang <minhongw@synology.com>
This makes it easier to figure out how frames are delivered directly
between BSSs operated within a single hostapd process.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add new messages to the end of the l2_oui_queue instead of inserting
them at the beginning so that the dl_list_for_each_safe() iteration in
hostapd_oui_deliver_later() goes through the messages in the same order
they were originally queued.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When using FT wildcard feature, the inter-AP protocol will send
broadcast messages to discover related APs.
For example,
12/6 16:24:43 FT: Send PMK-R1 pull request to remote R0KH address
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
12/6 16:24:43 FT: Send out sequence number request to
ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
If you have multiple interfaces/BSSs in a single hostapd process,
hostapd_wpa_auth_oui_iter() returned 1 after the first interface was
processed. Iteration in for_each_interface() will be stopped since it
gets a non-zero return value from hostapd_wpa_auth_oui_iter().
Even worse, the packet will not be sent to ethernet because
for_each_interface() returns non-zero value. hostapd_wpa_auth_send_oui()
will then return data_len immediately.
To prevent this, hostapd_wpa_auth_oui_iter() should not return 1 after
any successful transmission to other interfaces, if the dst_addr of
packet is a multicast address.
Signed-off-by: Jinglin Wang <bryanwang@synology.com>
Signed-off-by: MinHong Wang <minhongw@synology.com>
If the header of a PEM-formatted certificate or key in private_key file
indicates that it is wrapped with a TPM2 key, try to autoload the
appropriate OpenSSL engine that can transparently unwrap the key. This
enables systems to use TPM2-wrapped keys as drop-in replacements to
ordinary SSL keys.
This functionality needs
https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/openssl_tpm2_engine.git
to be installed as an OpenSSL engine.
Signed-off-by: Daniel Kobras <kobras@puzzle-itc.de>
ignore_broadcast_ssid=1 (or 2) were practically ignored if the Probe
Request frame included the SSID List or Short SSID List elements. Fix
this by requiring exact SSID match whenever ignore_broadcast_ssid is in
use regardless how SSID parameters are set in the Probe Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
According to IEEE P802.11ax/D6.0, 11.1.4.3.4 (Criteria for sending a
response), AP should answer Probe Request frames if either SSID or Short
SSID matches. Implement this part of the Short SSID use for the BSS (the
collocated 6 GHz BSS case is not covered in this commit).
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This can be used in the future to implement support for RNR and scanning
extensions using a shorter field for the SSID.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
We use the wired driver for wired port authentication with a slight
extension to add the port into a bridge upon successful authentication
and to remove it from the bridge when the session terminates.
Our expectation was that the Session-Timeout configuration at the RADIUS
server is respected, i.e. the session is terminated and would need
re-authentication - like it is working for WLAN sessions over the
nl80211 driver. Alas, it turned out the session is not terminated with
the wired driver.
It turned out that when ap_handle_session_timer() is executed, the
sta->flags of the wired port has only the WLAN_STA_AUTHORIZED bit set.
The WLAN_STA_AUTH bit, which is used to check whether the STA needs to
be de-authenticated, is missing.
Extend the check for any of the WLAN_STA_(AUTH | ASSOC | AUTHORIZED)
bits to solve this issue with the wired driver. That should not have any
side-effect for the WLAN cases since WLAN_STA_AUTH is expected to always
be set for those when there is an ongoing session and separate checks
for ASSOC and AUTHORIZED don't change this.
Signed-off-by: Zefir Kurtisi <zefir.kurtisi@neratec.com>
If hostapd or wpa_supplicant is started with both -s and -f command line
arguments, debug log ended up being written only into syslog and the log
file was left empty. Change this so that the log entries will be written
to both places. Either -s or -f (or both) results in debug log to stdout
being disabled which was already the case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This lets one know the current neighbor list, and could be used
to populate the neighbor list of other hostapd processes.
For instance:
$ hostapd_cli -i vap0001 show_neighbor
04:f0:21:1e:ae:b0 ssid=04f0211eaeb0af190000802809 nr=04f0211eaeb0af1900008028090603022a00
$ hostapd_cli -i vap0000 set_neighbor 04:f0:21:1e:ae:b0 ssid=04f0211eaeb0af190000802809 nr=04f0211eaeb0af1900008028090603022a00
OK
$ hostapd_cli -i vap0000 show_neighbor
04:f0:21:1e:ae:b0 ssid=04f0211eaeb0af190000802809 nr=04f0211eaeb0af1900008028090603022a00
04:f0:21:c3:b2:b0 ssid=04f021c3b2b0af190000802809 nr=04f021c3b2b0af1900008028090603022a00
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Move this implementation from check_40mhz_2g4() into a new helper
function check_bss_coex_40mhz function() so that it can be used in the
station mode case as well as the previously used AP mode case.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
Support for dynamic VLANs depends on the Linux bridge ioctls.
Add this dependency explicitely to drivers make files.
This fixes build for minimal hostapd configs such as:
CONFIG_DRIVER_WIRED=y
CONFIG_FULL_DYNAMIC_VLAN=y
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
WPS_EVENT_CANCEL is added to indicate cancellation of a WPS operation
for any reason in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
WPS_EVENT_PIN_ACTIVE is added to indicate when a PIN operation is
triggered in wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Veli Demirel <veli.demirel@airties.com>
Signed-off-by: Bilal Hatipoglu <bilal.hatipoglu@airties.com>
Normally nl80211 driver will attempt to strictly control what bridge
given interface is put in. It'll attempt to remove it from an existing
bridge if it doesn't match the configured one. If it's not in a bridge
it'll try to put it into one. If any of this fails then hostapd will
bail out and not set up the BSS at all.
Arguably that's reasonable since it allows to set the BSS up coherently
with regard to EAPOL handling as well as allows extra interactions with
things like FDB. However, not all hostapd drivers interact with bridge=
the same way. One example is atheros. Therefore it's not clear what the
desired behavior should be if consistency across drivers is considered.
There's a case where one might want to use a non-native Linux bridge,
e.g., openvswitch, in which case regular ioctls won't work to put an
interface into a bridge, or figure out what bridge an interface is in.
The underlying wireless driver can still be an ordinary nl80211 driver.
This change relaxes the bridge setup failure so that hostapd still
starts even if it fails to add an interface into a configured bridge
name. It still sets up all the necessary sockets (including the
configured bridge=) so EAPOL handling should work fine. This then leaves
it to the system integrator to manage wireless interface as bridge ports
and possibly fdb hints too.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal@plume.com>
In repeater configuration, both AP and STA wireless interfaces may be
included into the same bridge. In this case the following race condition
may occur: wpa_supplicant and hostapd are started, then hostapd clients
are connected before wpa_supplicant connects to remote AP. EAPOL packets
between hostapd and its clients are detected by wpa_supplicant on bridge
interface, prematurely disabling the workaround.
One possible option to fix this issue is to check EAPOL destination MAC
in wpa_supplicant and disable workaround only if EAPOL packet on bridge
interface is indeed intended for wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Sergey Matyukevich <sergey.matyukevich.os@quantenna.com>
This buffer was getting corrupted, so add more details to make it
clearer what causes the corruption should this type of regression show
up again.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The case where the old RSNE included one or more PMKIDs and that RSNE
was followed by another IE was handled incorrectly since the
os_memmove() to move the end of the buffer when removing old PMKIDs was
stopping copying at the end of the RSNE, not the end of the IE buffer.
This could result in corrupting the IE that followed the RSNE. In
practice, this broke FT-SAE with H2E by corrupting the RSNXE that is in
the buffer after the RSNE.
Fix this by copying the full end of the buffer (i.e., including the
following RSNXE in the visible error case) when removing the old PMKIDs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-SIM full authentication starts with one or more SIM/Start rounds, so
reject an unexpected SIM/Challenge round without any preceeding
SIM/Start rounds to avoid unexpected behavior. In practice, an attempt
to start with SIM/Challenge would have resulted in different MK being
derived and the Challenge message getting rejected due to mismatching
AT_MAC unless the misbehaving server has access to valid Kc, so the end
result is identical, but it is cleaner to reject the unexpected message
explicitly to avoid any risk of trying to proceed without NONCE_MT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These ciphers do not use a separate MAC algorithm, so digest nid will be
NID_undef. In addition, the fixed_iv_length needs to be set to 4 which
is the implicit part of the IV from PRF. This is needed to fix EAP-FAST
key derivation for cases where GCM/CCM ciphers are used for TLS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAPOL-Key message 1/4 without PMKID KDE was sent with 22 bytes of stray
data following a zero length key data field. These 22 bytes happens to
be the exact size of an PMKID KDE. Strip these trailing bytes by
checking whether a PMKID is available and adjust pmkid_len to 0 if not.
This was seen for example in capture files created by hwsim test case
suite_b_192 but code modified to handle also the other cases without
PMKID (Suite B no-KCK, FILS without PMKID available, SAE without PMKID
available).
Signed-off-by: Mikael Kanstrup <mikael.kanstrup@sony.com>
It was possible for the driver to advertise support for channels that
are not found from wpa_supplicant frequency-to-channel mapping (e.g.,
channel 182 at 5910 MHz) and that resulted in not initializing the
channel number information. Fix this by explicitly clearing the full
struct hostapd_channel_data buffer before parsing the information into
it from the driver.
This avoids some conditional jumps that could have dependent on
uninitialized values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
openssl engines may dynamically load external libraries. Our event_*()
functions happen to be named very generically, such that event_add()
collides with the libevent library (https://libevent.org/). This can
have disastrous effects (esp. when using CONFIG_WPA_TRACE, which enables
partial linking) when our SSL engines call into the WPS event_add()
instead of their intended libevent event_add().
Resolve this by providing a more unique prefix to these functions.
Rename performed via:
sed -i -E \
's:\<event_(add|delete_all|send_all_later|send_stop_all)\>:wps_upnp_event_\1:g' \
$(git grep -l event_)
Tested via (among other things) hwsim '-f ap_wps' module.
Signed-off-by: Brian Norris <briannorris@chromium.org>
On failure of json_alloc_token(), json_parse() can return without
freeing 'str' previously allocated by json_parse_string(). Fix this
adding proper call to os_free().
Signed-off-by: Davide Caratti <davide.caratti@gmail.com>
Fix a memory leak exposed by the dpp_own_config_sign_fail test.
Fixes: 52d469de11 ("DPP2: Support multiple Config Objects in Enrollee")
Signed-off-by: Alexander Wetzel <alexander@wetzel-home.de>
Add a QCA vendor subcommand QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_GET_STA_INFO with
attributes defined in enum qca_wlan_vendor_attr_get_sta to get
information for a BSS in STA mode or for a peer STA in AP mode. This
vendor sub command can be used to get STA information from the driver to
userspace. The attributes defined in enum
qca_wlan_vendor_attr_get_sta_info are used to encapsulate required
information.
Signed-off-by: Min Liu <minliu@codeaurora.org>
Use op_class to derive channel width for the operating channel when
op_class is configured by the user in both fixed channel and ACS cases.
We can avoid using ht_capab field to derive channel width especially in
the 6 GHz band in which only HE is supported.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Only HE mode is allowed in the 6 GHz band hence do not enable HT/VHT
even if they are configured by the user.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Add support to exclude non-PSC 6 GHz channels from the input frequency
list to ACS. The new acs_exclude_6ghz_non_psc=1 parameter can be used by
6 GHz only APs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The channel numbers are duplicated between 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz bands and 6
GHz band. Hence, add support to configure a list of frequencies to ACS
(freqlist) instead of a list of channel numbers (chanlist). Also, both 5
GHz and 6 GHz channels are referred by HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211A. The 6
GHz channels alone can be configured by using both mode and frequency
list.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Using the channel parameter for validating allowed channel combinations
is not scalable to add 6 GHz support in the future since channel numbers
are duplicated between 2.4 GHz / 5 GHz bands and 6 GHz band. Hence use
frequency field for all channel combination validation steps done before
starting AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
After receiving ACS offload results, select the current hw_mode based on
the frequency selected by the ACS algorithm. The current hw_mode will be
further used during other validation steps such as HT capability
validations, DFS validation, etc.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Using channel field while starting AP will cause issues with the new
6GHz band as the channel numbers are duplicated between the different
bands. Populate iface->freq before starting AP so that it can be used
instead of the channel number for all validations that need to be done
while starting AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Replace channel fields with frequency fields in ACS completed event
interface from the driver layer. Use
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_PRIMARY_FREQUENCY and
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_SECONDARY_FREQUENCY attributes if the driver
includes them in the QCA_NL80211_VENDOR_SUBCMD_DO_ACS event, otherwise
use QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_PRIMARY_CHANNEL and
QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_SECONDARY_CHANNEL attributes to maintain
backwards compatibility with old drivers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The 5 GHz channels are stored in one hw_features set with mode
HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211A while the 6 GHz channels will need to stored in
a separate hw_features set (but with same mode HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211A)
due to possibility of different HE capabilities being available between
the 5 GHz and 6 GHz bands.
Search through all hw_features sets whose mode is same as the input mode
while finding channel corresponding to the input frequency in
hw_get_channel_freq().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The 5 GHz channels are stored in one hw_features set with mode
HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211A while the 6 GHz channels will need to stored in
a separate hw_features set (but with same mode HOSTAPD_MODE_IEEE80211A)
due to possibility of different HE capabilities being available between
the 5 GHz and 6 GHz bands.
Iterate through all hw_features sets and populate channels from all
hw_features sets whose hardware mode is matching the configured hardware
mode while preparing the channel list for ACS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This allows a P2P connection over P802.11ay EDMG channels to achieve the
highest link speed that the standard allows for channel bonding (CB) up
to CB4.
Let each P2P peer add its EDMG channels to the Supported Channels IE
advertised in P2P GO negotiation. Give EDMG channels priority when peers
negotiate for operating channel.
User may add 'edmg' parameter to p2p_connect, p2p_add_group, and
p2p_invite commands to prefer an EDMG channel for the P2P link. User may
also set p2p_go_edmg=1 in wpa_supplicant configuration file to prefer
EDMG.
When EDMG is used, P2P will try to find the highest channel bonding
supported channel that matches the frequency parameter, if the devices
do not support EDMG, the P2P connection will use a legacy (1-6) 60 GHz
channel.
Signed-off-by: Ahmad Masri <amasri@codeaurora.org>
Update new channels in Channel Bonding (CB2 ... CB4) in the 60 GHz band
for different regulatory regions according to the latest draft amendment
IEEE P802.11ay/D5.0.
Signed-off-by: Ahmad Masri <amasri@codeaurora.org>
Add EDMG bandwidth to CHANWIDTH_ defines.
Update API ieee80211_freq_to_channel_ext() to support EDMG bandwidth
for EDMG channels.
Signed-off-by: Ahmad Masri <amasri@codeaurora.org>
This is mainly for testing purposes to be able to check which groups
a STA reports as having been rejected when using SAE H2E.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
The netRole enum is more generic and can be extended to include new
roles (e.g., Configurator) more easily.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This new hostapd configuration parameter rsnxe_override_eapol=<hexdump>
can be used to override RSNXE value in EAPOL-Key msg 3/4 for testing
purposes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, this case was ignored silently in AP mode. While that could
be a reasonable approach for an unexpected condition, it would be fine
to reject this case explicitly as well. This makes it somewhat easier to
test unexpected SAE H2E vs. looping behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
check_sae_rejected_groups() returns 1, not -1, in case an enabled group
is rejected. The previous check for < 0 could not have ever triggered.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, this case was ignored silently in AP mode. While that could
be a reasonable approach for an unexpected condition, it would be fine
to reject this case explicitly as well. This makes it somewhat easier to
test unexpected SAE H2E vs. looping behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
freq_list is built in allocated heap memory and it needs to be freed
before returning from this function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Clean up do_acs interface to not pass ch_list to drivers as the same
information is available in freq_list. The channel numbers are
duplicated between 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands and the 6 GHz band. So, use
the QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_CH_LIST to populate only 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
channels to ensure backwards compatibility with old drivers which do not
have support to decode the newer QCA_WLAN_VENDOR_ATTR_ACS_FREQ_LIST
attribute.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Skip DFS checks and CAC operation for 6 GHz channels. AFC checks
will be added for 6 GHz channels later.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
HT capability check is not required when starting AP on 6 GHz band as
only HE operation mode is allowed in the 6 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
This extends hostapd and wpa_supplicant DPP implementation to allow the
bootstrapping URI to be generated for and parsed from an NFC Tag with an
NFC URI Record. This is similar to the way the bootstrapping URI is used
with QR Code for unidirectional authentication.
The DPP_BOOTSTRAP_GEN command uses "type=nfc-uri" to request the URI to
be assigned for NFC URI Record. In practice, the URI is generated
identically to the QR Code case, but the internal entry maintains the
NFC-URI type.
A new command "DPP_NFC_URI <uri>" can now be used to parse the URI read
from an NFC Tag with the NFC URI Record. This is similar to the
DPP_QR_CODE command.
Other commands (mainly, DPP_LISTEN and DPP_AUTH_INIT) are used for NFC
URI in the same way as they are used for QR Code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Commit 844dfeb804 ("QCA vendor command support to set band to driver")
added a vendor command to pass 'SET setband' command information to the
driver in wpa_supplicant. Add similar changes to hostapd control
interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
Previously, nonzero sae_h2e parameter values were used to perform SAE
H2E specific operations (deriving PT, adding RSNXE, adding H2E-only BSS
membership selector) in AP mode even if SAE was not enabled for the
network. This could result in unexpected behavior if sae_pwe=1 or
sae_pwe=2 were set in the configuration. Fix this by making the SAE
operations conditional on SAE being actually enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@codeaurora.org>
